e40dd4ed52527662b5f214dccff35b367f132c55
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @dircategory Software development
5 @direntry
6 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
7 @end direntry
8
9 @ifinfo
10 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11 Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end ifinfo
24
25 @setchapternewpage off
26 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
28 @syncodeindex fn cp
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @titlepage
32 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
33 @subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34 @author John Gilmore
35 @author Cygnus Solutions
36 @author Second Edition:
37 @author Stan Shebs
38 @author Cygnus Solutions
39 @page
40 @tex
41 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
43 {\parskip=0pt
44 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45 \hfill \manvers\par
46 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47 }
48 @end tex
49
50 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51 Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
54 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59 Free Documentation License''.
60 @end titlepage
61
62 @contents
63
64 @node Top
65 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67 @top Scope of this Document
68
69 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
70 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
73 @menu
74 * Requirements::
75 * Overall Structure::
76 * Algorithms::
77 * User Interface::
78 * libgdb::
79 * Symbol Handling::
80 * Language Support::
81 * Host Definition::
82 * Target Architecture Definition::
83 * Target Descriptions::
84 * Target Vector Definition::
85 * Native Debugging::
86 * Support Libraries::
87 * Coding::
88 * Porting GDB::
89 * Versions and Branches::
90 * Start of New Year Procedure::
91 * Releasing GDB::
92 * Testsuite::
93 * Hints::
94
95 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
97 * Index::
98 @end menu
99
100 @node Requirements
101
102 @chapter Requirements
103 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
104
105 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
106 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
107 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
108 that have run counter to these requirements.
109
110 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
111 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
112 shell. It's not a programming environment.
113
114 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
115 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
116 programmer.
117
118 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
119 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
120 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
121 to debugger commands.
122
123 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
124 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
125 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
126 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
127 mollify the debugger.
128
129 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
130 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
131 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
132
133 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
134 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
135 supports.
136
137
138 @node Overall Structure
139
140 @chapter Overall Structure
141
142 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
143 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
144 @dfn{target side}).
145
146 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
147 supporting code.
148
149 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
150 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
151 parsing, type and value printing.
152
153 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
154 physical target manipulation.
155
156 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
157 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
158 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
159 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
160 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
161 should fit together.
162
163 @section The Symbol Side
164
165 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
166 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
167 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
168 many kinds of expressions.
169
170 @section The Target Side
171
172 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
173 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
174 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
175 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
176
177 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
178 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
179 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
180 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
181 way.
182
183 @section Configurations
184
185 @cindex host
186 @cindex target
187 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
188 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
189 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
190 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
191
192 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
193 Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
194 float format.
195
196 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
197 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
198 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
199 to call a function.
200
201 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
202 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
203 host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
204 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
205 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
206 in the native-dependent files.
207
208 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
209 are really part of the target environment, but which require
210 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
211 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
212
213 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
214 have to include all three kinds of information.
215
216 @section Source Tree Structure
217 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
218
219 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
220 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
221 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
222 @file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
223
224 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
225 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
226 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
227 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
228 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
229 parlance for the program being debugged).
230
231 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
232 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
233 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
234 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
235 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
236
237 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
238 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
239 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
240
241 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
242
243 @table @file
244 @item cli
245 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
246 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
247
248 @item gdbserver
249 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
250
251 @item gdbtk
252 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
253
254 @item mi
255 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
256
257 @item signals
258 Target signal translation code.
259
260 @item tui
261 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
262 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
263 @end table
264
265 @node Algorithms
266
267 @chapter Algorithms
268 @cindex algorithms
269
270 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
271 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
272 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
273 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
274 they use.
275
276 @section Frames
277
278 @cindex frame
279 @cindex call stack frame
280 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
281 and called functions.
282
283 @cindex frame, unwind
284 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
285 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
286 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
287 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
288 read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
289
290 @findex frame_register_unwind
291 @findex get_frame_register
292 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
293 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
294 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
295 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
296 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
297 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
298 frame itself?
299
300 @cindex sentinel frame
301 @findex get_frame_type
302 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
303 To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
304 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
305 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
306 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
307 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
308
309 @section Prologue Analysis
310
311 @cindex prologue analysis
312 @cindex call frame information
313 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
314 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
315 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
316 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
317 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
318 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
319 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
320 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
321 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
322
323 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
324 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
325 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
326 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
327 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
328 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
329 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
330 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
331 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
332 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
333 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
334 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
335 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
336
337 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
338 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
339 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
340 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
341 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
342 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
343 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
344 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
345 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
346 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
347
348 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
349 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
350 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
351 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
352 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
353 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
354 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
355 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
356 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
357 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
358 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
359 starts with the instruction:
360
361 @example
362 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
363 @end example
364 @noindent
365 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
366 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
367 value.
368
369 If we then see an instruction like:
370
371 @example
372 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
373 @end example
374 @noindent
375 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
376 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
377
378 If the next instruction were:
379
380 @example
381 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
382 @end example
383 @noindent
384 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
385 @code{r1} plus 64.
386
387 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
388 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
389 registers. So after an instruction like this:
390
391 @example
392 mov (fp+4), r2
393 @end example
394 @noindent
395 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
396 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
397
398 And so on.
399
400 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
401 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
402 the instruction:
403
404 @example
405 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
406 @end example
407 @noindent
408 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
409 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
410 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
411 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
412 information is acceptable for our application.
413
414 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
415 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
416 never inaccurate.
417
418 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
419 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
420 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
421 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
422 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
423 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
424 kept track of.
425
426 @itemize @bullet
427
428 @item
429 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
430 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
431 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
432 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
433 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
434 we don't know the frame size.
435
436 @item
437 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
438 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
439 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
440 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
441 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
442 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
443 @end itemize
444
445 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
446 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
447 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
448 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
449 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
450 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
451 and maintain. In the approach described above:
452
453 @itemize @bullet
454
455 @item
456 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
457 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
458 the effect of each instruction.
459
460 @item
461 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
462 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
463 wasn't already broken before.
464
465 @item
466 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
467 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
468 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
469 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
470 already gathering the right data for you.
471
472 @end itemize
473
474 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
475 the framework and how to use it.
476
477
478 @section Breakpoint Handling
479
480 @cindex breakpoints
481 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
482 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
483 that location.
484
485 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
486 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
487
488 @cindex hardware breakpoints
489 @cindex program counter
490 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
491 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
492 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
493 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
494 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
495 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
496
497 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
498 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
499 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
500 address.
501
502 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
503 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
504 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
505 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
506 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
507 for something to happen.
508
509 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
510 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
511 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
512 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
513 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
514 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
515 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
516
517 @cindex software breakpoints
518 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
519 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
520 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
521 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
522 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
523 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
524 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
525
526 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
527 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
528 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
529 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
530
531 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
532 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
533 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
534 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
535 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
536 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
537 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
538 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
539 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
540 instruction.
541
542 @findex BREAKPOINT
543 The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
544 @code{BREAKPOINT}.
545
546 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
547 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
548
549 @table @code
550 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
551 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
552 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
553 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
555 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
556 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
557 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
558 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
559 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
560 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
561 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
562 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
563 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
564 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
565 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
566 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
567 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
568 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
569
570 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
571 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
572 the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
573 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
574 used to remove the breakpoint.
575
576 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
577 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
578 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
579 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
581 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
582 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
583 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
584 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
585 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
586 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
587 but @code{placed_size} may be.
588 @end table
589
590 @section Single Stepping
591
592 @section Signal Handling
593
594 @section Thread Handling
595
596 @section Inferior Function Calls
597
598 @section Longjmp Support
599
600 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
601 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
602 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
603 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
604 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
605 command.
606
607 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
608 To make this work, you need to define a function called
609 @code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
610 structure and extract the longjmp target address. Since @code{jmp_buf}
611 is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
612 @file{tm-@var{target}.h} file. Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
613 @file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
614
615 @section Watchpoints
616 @cindex watchpoints
617
618 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
619 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
620 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
621 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
622 hunt down and kill such bugs.
623
624 @cindex hardware watchpoints
625 @cindex software watchpoints
626 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
627 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
628 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
629 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
630 will use software watchpoints are:
631
632 @itemize @bullet
633 @item
634 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
635 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
636 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
637 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
638 watchpoints.
639
640 @item
641 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
642 registers (as opposed to memory).
643
644 @item
645 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
646 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
647 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
648 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
649 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
650
651 @item
652 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
653 implementation.
654 @end itemize
655
656 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
657 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
658 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
659 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
660
661 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
662 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
663 It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
664 was hit. If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
665
666 Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
667 once. This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
668 triggered, if the target can determine it. If the triggered address
669 is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
670 method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
671 For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
672 every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
673 For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
674 @emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
675 and access watchpoints will never be considered hit. For data-write
676 watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
677 considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
678 otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints. For
679 each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
680 the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
681 watched value has changed. Watchpoints whose watched values have
682 changed are announced as hit.
683
684 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
685 watchpoints:
686
687 @table @code
688 @findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
689 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
690 If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
691
692 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
693 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
694 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
695 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
696 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
697 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
698 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
699 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
700 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
701 the same time).
702
703 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
704 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
705 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
706 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
707
708 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
709 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
710 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
711 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
712 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
713 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
714 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
715 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
716 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
717
718 @smallexample
719 enum target_hw_bp_type
720 @{
721 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
722 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
723 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
724 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
725 @};
726 @end smallexample
727
728 @noindent
729 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
730
731 @findex target_stopped_data_address
732 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
733 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
734 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
735 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. This
736 is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints. It is
737 not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
738 it to improve handling of those also.
739
740 @value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
741 immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}. If the
742 target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
743 resuming, this method should clear it. For instance, the x86 debug
744 control register has sticky triggered flags.
745
746 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
747 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
748 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
749 watchpoint to step over it. Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
750 this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
751 which will perform an interesting read or write. It should be
752 set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
753 to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
754 watchpoint exception again.
755
756 @findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
757 @item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
758 If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
759 watchpoint to step the inferior over it. This is usually set when
760 watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
761 interesting read or write.
762
763 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
764 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
765 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
766 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit. This is usually set
767 when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
768 read or write.
769
770 @findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
771 @item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
772 If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
773 watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
774
775 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
776 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
777 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
778 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
779 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
780 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
781 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
782 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
783 the @var{wait_status} argument.
784
785 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
786 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
787 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
788 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
789 @end table
790
791 @subsection Watchpoints and Threads
792 @cindex watchpoints, with threads
793
794 @value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
795 in all threads. @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
796 act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
797 watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread. Therefore, even
798 if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
799 watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
800 per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value. On
801 @sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
802 @code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
803 @code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
804 @code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
805 threads.
806
807 @value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
808 at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
809 multi-threaded programs. When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
810 queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
811 is resumed. This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
812 @code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
813 thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}. If
814 two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
815 will be called a second time for the second thread.
816
817 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
818 @cindex x86 debug registers
819 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
820
821 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
822 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
823 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
824 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
825 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
826
827 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
828 following:
829
830 @itemize @bullet
831 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
832 @item
833 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
834 target-dependent headers.
835
836 @item
837 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
838 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
839
840 @item
841 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
842 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
843 @code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
844
845 @item
846 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
847 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
848 which does the real work.
849 @end itemize
850
851 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
852 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
853 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
854 provide:
855
856 @table @code
857 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
858 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
859 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
860
861 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
862 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
863 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
864
865 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
866 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
867 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
868 number @var{idx}.
869
870 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
871 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
872 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
873 used immediately after it is returned by
874 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
875 register values.
876 @end table
877
878 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
879 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
880 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
881 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
882 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
883 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
884 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
885 anything to use this feature.
886
887 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
888 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
889 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
890 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
891 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
892 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
893 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
894 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
895
896 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
897 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
898
899 @table @code
900 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
901 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
902 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
903 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
904 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
905 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
906 processors.
907
908 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
909 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
910 The target function
911 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
912 This
913 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
914 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
915 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
916 set in DR6.
917
918 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
919 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
920 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
921 is set to call this function. The
922 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
923 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
924 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
925 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
926 returned.
927
928 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
929 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
930 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
931 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
932 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
933 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
934 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
935 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
936 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
937 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
938 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
939 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
940 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
941 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
942 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
943 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
944 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
945 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
946 each debug register.
947
948 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
949 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
950 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
951 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
952 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
953 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
954 decrements the reference count, and only calls
955 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
956 the count goes to zero.
957
958 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
959 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
960 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
961 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
962 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
963 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
964 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
965 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
966 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
967 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
968 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
969 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
970 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
971 register.
972
973 @findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
974 @item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
975 This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
976 hardware breakpoint that triggered. It works like
977 @code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
978 address whose watchpoint triggered.
979
980 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
981 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
982 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
983 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
984 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
985 @end table
986
987 @noindent
988 @strong{Notes:}
989 @enumerate 1
990 @item
991 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
992 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
993 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
994 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
995 on x86.
996
997 @item
998 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
999 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
1000 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1001 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
1002 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1003 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1004 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1005 unavailable in many platforms.
1006 @end enumerate
1007
1008 @section Checkpoints
1009 @cindex checkpoints
1010 @cindex restart
1011 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1012 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1013
1014 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1015 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1016 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
1017 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1018 of open files and devices.
1019
1020 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1021 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1022 method implemented on the target side.
1023
1024 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1025 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1026 not typically include information about external entities such as
1027 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1028
1029 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1030 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
1031 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1032 be used on other systems.
1033
1034 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1035 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1036 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1037 details of how it is done.
1038
1039
1040 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1041 @cindex observer pattern interface
1042 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
1043
1044 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1045 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
1046 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1047 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1048 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1049 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1050 a strong limitation.
1051
1052 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1053 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1054 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1055 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1056 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1057 interface when adding new notifications.
1058
1059 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1060 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1061 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1062
1063 @node User Interface
1064
1065 @chapter User Interface
1066
1067 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces. Although the command-line interface
1068 is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1069
1070 @section Command Interpreter
1071
1072 @cindex command interpreter
1073 @cindex CLI
1074 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1075 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1076 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1077 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1078
1079 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1080 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1081 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1082
1083 @findex add_cmd
1084 @findex add_com
1085 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1086 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1087 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1088 the ends of most source files.
1089
1090 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1091 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1092 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1093 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1094 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1095 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1096 the new command structures for manipulation.
1097
1098 @cindex deprecating commands
1099 @findex deprecate_cmd
1100 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1101 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1102 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1103 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1104 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1105 command immediately after it is created.
1106
1107 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1108 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1109 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1110 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1111
1112 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1113 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1114 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1115
1116 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1117 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1118 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1119 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1120 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1121 every UI, to produce output.
1122
1123 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1124
1125 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1126 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1127
1128 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1129
1130 @itemize @bullet
1131 @item
1132 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1133
1134 @item
1135 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1136 operation;
1137
1138 @item
1139 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1140 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1141
1142 @item
1143 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1144
1145 @item
1146 to show @emph{debug data};
1147
1148 @item
1149 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1150 @end itemize
1151
1152 @noindent
1153 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1154 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1155
1156 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1157 involves one or more of the following:
1158
1159 @itemize @bullet
1160 @item
1161 output of the actual data
1162
1163 @item
1164 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1165 easily readable by humans
1166
1167 @item
1168 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1169 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1170
1171 @item
1172 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1173 parts in the output
1174 @end itemize
1175
1176 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1177 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1178 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1179 deprecated.
1180
1181 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1182 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1183 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1184 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1185
1186 @table @code
1187 @item <table> @expansion{}
1188 @code{<header> <body>}
1189 @item <header> @expansion{}
1190 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1191 @item <column> @expansion{}
1192 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1193 @item <body> @expansion{}
1194 @code{@{<row>@}}
1195 @end table
1196
1197
1198 @subsection General Conventions
1199
1200 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1201 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1202 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1203
1204 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1205 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1206
1207 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1208 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1209 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1210 format.
1211
1212 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1213 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1214
1215
1216 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1217
1218 @cindex list output functions
1219 @cindex table output functions
1220 @cindex tuple output functions
1221 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1222 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1223 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1224
1225 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1226 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1227 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1228
1229 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1230 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1231 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1232
1233 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1234 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1235 maximum of five levels.
1236
1237 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1238
1239 @smallexample
1240 ui_out_table_begin
1241 ui_out_table_header
1242 @dots{}
1243 ui_out_table_body
1244 ui_out_tuple_begin
1245 ui_out_field_*
1246 @dots{}
1247 ui_out_tuple_end
1248 @dots{}
1249 ui_out_table_end
1250 @end smallexample
1251
1252 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1253 functions:
1254
1255 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1256 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1257 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1258 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1259 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1260 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1261 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1262 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1263 was @code{malloc}ed.
1264
1265 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1266 the end of the table's output.
1267 @end deftypefun
1268
1269 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1270 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1271 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1272 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1273 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1274
1275 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1276 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1277 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1278 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1279 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1280 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1281 call.
1282 @end deftypefun
1283
1284 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1285 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1286 @end deftypefun
1287
1288 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1289 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1290 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1291 functions.
1292
1293 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1294 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1295 will signal an internal error.
1296 @end deftypefun
1297
1298 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1299 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1300 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1301 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1302 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1303
1304 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1305 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1306 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1307 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1308 after the call.
1309 @end deftypefun
1310
1311 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1312 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1313 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1314 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1315 be signaled.
1316 @end deftypefun
1317
1318 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1319 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1320 (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple. It provides a convenient
1321 and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1322 cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1323 @smallexample
1324 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1325 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1326 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1327 uiout);
1328 @end smallexample
1329 @end deftypefun
1330
1331 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1332 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1333 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1334 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1335 after the call.
1336 @end deftypefun
1337
1338 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1339 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1340 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1341 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1342 be signaled.
1343 @end deftypefun
1344
1345 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1346 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1347 opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1348 that will close the list.
1349 @end deftypefun
1350
1351 @subsection Item Output Functions
1352
1353 @cindex item output functions
1354 @cindex field output functions
1355 @cindex data output
1356 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1357 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1358
1359 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1360
1361 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1362 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1363 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1364 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1365 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1366 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1367 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1368
1369 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1370 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1371 @end deftypefun
1372
1373 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1374 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1375 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1376 the name of the field.
1377 @end deftypefun
1378
1379 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1380 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1381 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1382 @var{fldname} specifies
1383 the name of the field.
1384 @end deftypefun
1385
1386 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1387 This function outputs an address.
1388 @end deftypefun
1389
1390 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1391 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1392 specification.
1393 @end deftypefun
1394
1395 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1396 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1397 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1398 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1399 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1400 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1401 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1402 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1403 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1404 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1405 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1406 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1407 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1408 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1409
1410 @deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1411 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1412 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1413 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1414 @code{ui_stream} object.
1415 @end deftypefun
1416
1417 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1418 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1419 @var{streambuf}.
1420 @end deftypefun
1421
1422 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1424 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1425 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1426 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1427 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1428 @end deftypefun
1429
1430 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1431 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1432 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1433 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1434 skeleton code to do that:
1435
1436 @smallexample
1437 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1438 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1439 ...
1440 do_cleanups (old);
1441 @end smallexample
1442
1443 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1444 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1445
1446 @smallexample
1447 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1448 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1449 @end smallexample
1450
1451 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1452 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1453 same buffer twice.
1454
1455 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1456
1457 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1458 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1459 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1460 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1461 @end deftypefun
1462
1463 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1464 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1465 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1466 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1467 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1468
1469 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1470 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1471 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1472 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1473 output short messages.
1474 @end deftypefun
1475
1476 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1477 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1478 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1479 list.
1480 @end deftypefun
1481
1482 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1483 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1484 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1485 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1486 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1487 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1488 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1489 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1490 @end deftypefun
1491
1492 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1493 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1494 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1495 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1496 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1497 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1498 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1499 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1500 @end deftypefun
1501
1502 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1503 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1504 the UI buffers output.
1505 @end deftypefun
1506
1507
1508 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1509
1510 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1511 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1512 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1513 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1514 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1515 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1516
1517 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1518 produce a table.
1519
1520 The original code was:
1521
1522 @smallexample
1523 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1524 @{
1525 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1526
1527 annotate_field (0);
1528 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1529 annotate_field (1);
1530 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1531 annotate_field (2);
1532 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1533 annotate_field (3);
1534 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1535 if (addressprint)
1536 @{
1537 annotate_field (4);
1538 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1539 @}
1540 annotate_field (5);
1541 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1542
1543 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1544 @}
1545 @end smallexample
1546
1547 Here's the new version:
1548
1549 @smallexample
1550 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1551
1552 if (addressprint)
1553 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1554 else
1555 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1556
1557 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1558 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1559 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1560 annotate_field (0);
1561 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1562 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563 annotate_field (1);
1564 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1565 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1566 annotate_field (2);
1567 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1568 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1569 annotate_field (3);
1570 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1571 if (addressprint)
1572 @{
1573 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574 annotate_field (4);
1575 if (gdbarch_addr_bit (current_gdbarch) <= 32)
1576 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1577 else
1578 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1579 @}
1580 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1581 annotate_field (5);
1582 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1583 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1584 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1585 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1586 @end smallexample
1587
1588 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1589 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1590 in the above example. The original code was:
1591
1592 @smallexample
1593 annotate_record ();
1594 annotate_field (0);
1595 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1596 annotate_field (1);
1597 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1598 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1599 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1600 (int)b->type);
1601 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1602 annotate_field (2);
1603 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1604 annotate_field (3);
1605 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1606 @dots{}
1607 @end smallexample
1608
1609 This is the new version:
1610
1611 @smallexample
1612 annotate_record ();
1613 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1614 annotate_field (0);
1615 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1616 annotate_field (1);
1617 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1618 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1619 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1620 (int) b->type);
1621 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1622 annotate_field (2);
1623 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1624 annotate_field (3);
1625 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1626 @dots{}
1627 @end smallexample
1628
1629 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1630 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1631 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1632 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1633
1634 @smallexample
1635 annotate_field (5);
1636 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1637 @end smallexample
1638
1639 The new version is:
1640
1641 @smallexample
1642 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1643 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1644 ...
1645 annotate_field (5);
1646 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1647 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1648 @end smallexample
1649
1650 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1651 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1652 was:
1653
1654 @smallexample
1655 annotate_field (5);
1656 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1657 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1658 else
1659 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1660 @end smallexample
1661
1662 It became:
1663
1664 @smallexample
1665 annotate_field (5);
1666 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1667 @{
1668 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1669 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1670 @}
1671 else
1672 @{
1673 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1674 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1675 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1676 @}
1677 @end smallexample
1678
1679 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1680 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1681 code was:
1682
1683 @smallexample
1684 annotate_field (5);
1685 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1686 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1687 @end smallexample
1688
1689 It became:
1690
1691 @smallexample
1692 annotate_field (5);
1693 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1694 @{
1695 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1696 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1697 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1698 @}
1699 @end smallexample
1700
1701 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1702 code was:
1703
1704 @smallexample
1705 annotate_field (5);
1706 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1707 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1708 @end smallexample
1709
1710 It became:
1711
1712 @smallexample
1713 annotate_field (5);
1714 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1715 @{
1716 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1717 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1718 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1719 @}
1720 @end smallexample
1721
1722 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1723
1724 @smallexample
1725 annotate_field (4);
1726 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1727 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1728 @end smallexample
1729
1730 It became:
1731
1732 @smallexample
1733 annotate_field (4);
1734 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1735 @end smallexample
1736
1737
1738 @section Console Printing
1739
1740 @section TUI
1741
1742 @node libgdb
1743
1744 @chapter libgdb
1745
1746 @section libgdb 1.0
1747 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1748 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1749 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1750
1751 @section libgdb 2.0
1752 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1753 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1754 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1755
1756 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1757 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1758
1759 @itemize @bullet
1760 @item
1761 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1762 @item
1763 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1764 @item
1765 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1766 @item
1767 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1768 @end itemize
1769
1770 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1771
1772 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1773
1774 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1775
1776 @itemize @bullet
1777 @item
1778 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1779 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1780 state, etc).
1781 @item
1782 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1783 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1784 @end itemize
1785
1786 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1787 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1788 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1789 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1790 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1791
1792 @section CLI support
1793
1794 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1795 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1796 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1797 requirements.
1798
1799 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1800 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1801 out the theory:
1802
1803 @itemize @bullet
1804 @item
1805 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1806 @item
1807 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1808 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1809 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1810 @item
1811 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1812 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1813 @end itemize
1814
1815 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1816 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1817 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1818 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1819 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1820 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1821
1822 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1823 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1824 client's custom builder).
1825
1826 @section @code{libgdb} components
1827
1828 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1829 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1830 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1831 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1832 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1833 finished the current command.
1834
1835 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1836 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1837 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1838 when doing any queries.
1839
1840 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1841 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1842 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1843 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1844 implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1845
1846 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1847 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1848 instead of returning.
1849
1850 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1851 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1852 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1853 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1854 before the query function returns.
1855
1856 @node Symbol Handling
1857
1858 @chapter Symbol Handling
1859
1860 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include variables,
1861 functions, and types.
1862
1863 @section Symbol Reading
1864
1865 @cindex symbol reading
1866 @cindex reading of symbols
1867 @cindex symbol files
1868 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
1869 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1870 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1871 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1872 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1873 reading symbols from shared libraries.
1874
1875 @findex find_sym_fns
1876 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1877 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
1878 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1879 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1880
1881 @findex add_symtab_fns
1882 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1883 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1884 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1885 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
1886 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1887 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1888 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
1889 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1890 prefix.
1891
1892 The functions supplied by each module are:
1893
1894 @table @code
1895 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1896
1897 @cindex secondary symbol file
1898 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1899 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1900 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1901 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1902 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1903 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1904
1905 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1906 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1907 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1908 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
1909 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1910 in the @code{private} field.
1911
1912 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1913 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1914
1915 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1916
1917 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1918 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1919 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1920 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
1921 arguments and no result. It may be called after
1922 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1923 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1924
1925 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1926
1927 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1928 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1929
1930 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1931 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
1932 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1933 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1934 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1935 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1936 @end table
1937
1938 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1939 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1940 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1941 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1942
1943 @table @code
1944 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1945
1946 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1947 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1948 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1949 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1950 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1951 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1952 @end table
1953
1954 @section Partial Symbol Tables
1955
1956 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1957
1958 @itemize @bullet
1959 @cindex full symbol table
1960 @cindex symtabs
1961 @item
1962 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
1963 information about symbols and addresses.
1964
1965 @cindex psymtabs
1966 @item
1967 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
1968 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1969 symbol table.
1970
1971 @cindex minimal symbol table
1972 @cindex minsymtabs
1973 @item
1974 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
1975 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1976 @end itemize
1977
1978 @cindex partial symbol table
1979 This section describes partial symbol tables.
1980
1981 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1982 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
1983 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1984 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1985 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1986 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1987 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1988 the user.
1989 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1990
1991 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1992 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1993 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1994 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1995
1996 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1997 full symbol table would represent.
1998
1999 @cindex finding a symbol
2000 @cindex symbol lookup
2001 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2002 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2003
2004 @itemize @bullet
2005 @findex find_pc_function
2006 @findex find_pc_line
2007 @item
2008 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2009 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
2010 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2011 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2012 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2013
2014 @cindex lookup_symbol
2015 @item
2016 By its name
2017 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2018 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2019 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
2020 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2021 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2022 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2023 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
2024 does most of the work here.
2025 @end itemize
2026
2027 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2028 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2029 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
2030 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2031 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2032 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2033 name.
2034
2035 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2036 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2037 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2038 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2039 ranges.
2040
2041 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2042 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
2043 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2044 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2045 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2046 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2047 unless you want to do a lot more work.
2048
2049 @section Types
2050
2051 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2052
2053 @cindex fundamental types
2054 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2055 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2056 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2057 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2058 knows about.
2059
2060 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2061
2062 @cindex type codes
2063 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2064 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2065 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2066 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2067 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2068 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2069 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2070
2071 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2072
2073 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2074 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2075 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2076 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2077 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2078 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2079 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2080 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2081 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2082 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2083 some particular objfile.
2084
2085 @section Object File Formats
2086 @cindex object file formats
2087
2088 @subsection a.out
2089
2090 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2091 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2092 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2093 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2094 respectively.
2095
2096 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2097 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2098 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2099 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2100 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2101
2102 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2103
2104 @subsection COFF
2105
2106 @cindex COFF format
2107 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2108 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2109 number of sections is limited.
2110
2111 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2112 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited. For
2113 instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2114 included file.
2115
2116 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2117
2118 @subsection ECOFF
2119
2120 @cindex ECOFF format
2121 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2122 workstations.
2123
2124 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2125
2126 @subsection XCOFF
2127
2128 @cindex XCOFF format
2129 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2130 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2131 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2132 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2133 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2134
2135 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2136 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2137 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2138 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2139 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2140 been run (or the core file has been read).
2141
2142 @subsection PE
2143
2144 @cindex PE-COFF format
2145 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2146 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2147
2148 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2149 COFF reader.
2150
2151 @subsection ELF
2152
2153 @cindex ELF format
2154 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is similar
2155 to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2156 many of COFF's limitations.
2157
2158 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2159
2160 @subsection SOM
2161
2162 @cindex SOM format
2163 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2164 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2165
2166 The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2167
2168 @section Debugging File Formats
2169
2170 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2171 are independent of the object file format.
2172
2173 @subsection stabs
2174
2175 @cindex stabs debugging info
2176 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2177 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2178 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2179
2180 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2181 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2182 the real work.
2183
2184 @subsection COFF
2185
2186 @cindex COFF debugging info
2187 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2188 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2189
2190 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2191
2192 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2193 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2194
2195 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2196
2197 @subsection DWARF 2
2198
2199 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2200 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2201
2202 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2203
2204 @subsection SOM
2205
2206 @cindex SOM debugging info
2207 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2208
2209 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2210
2211 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2212 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2213 there is probably little to be done.
2214
2215 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2216 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2217
2218 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2219 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2220 from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2221 information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2222 internal data structures.
2223
2224 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2225 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2226 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2227 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2228 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2229 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2230
2231 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2232
2233 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2234 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2235 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2236
2237 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2238 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2239 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2240 they could be unloaded at different times.
2241
2242 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2243 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2244 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2245 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2246
2247
2248 @node Language Support
2249
2250 @chapter Language Support
2251
2252 @cindex language support
2253 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2254 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2255 manually.
2256
2257 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2258 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2259 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2260 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2261
2262 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2263
2264 @cindex adding source language
2265 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2266 following steps:
2267
2268 @table @emph
2269 @item Create the expression parser.
2270
2271 @cindex expression parser
2272 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2273 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2274 @file{parse.c}.
2275
2276 @cindex language parser
2277 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2278 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2279 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2280 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2281
2282 @smallexample
2283 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2284 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2285 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2286 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2287 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2288 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2289 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2290 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2291 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2292 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2293 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2294 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2295 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2296 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2297 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2298 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2299 @end smallexample
2300
2301 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2302 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2303 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2304 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2305 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2306 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2307 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2308 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2309 for more information.
2310
2311 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2312
2313 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2314 @findex evaluate_subexp
2315 @findex prefixify_subexp
2316 @findex length_of_subexp
2317 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2318 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2319 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2320 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2321 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2322 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2323 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2324
2325 @item Update some existing code
2326
2327 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2328 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2329
2330 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2331 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2332 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2333 statement, an error is reported.
2334
2335 @vindex current_language
2336 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2337 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2338 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2339 string.
2340
2341 @findex _initialize_language
2342 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2343 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2344 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2345
2346 @findex allocate_symtab
2347 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2348 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2349 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2350 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2351 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2352 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2353 code.
2354
2355 @findex print_subexp
2356 @findex op_print_tab
2357 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2358 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2359 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2360
2361 @item Add a place of call
2362
2363 @findex parse_exp_1
2364 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2365 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2366
2367 @item Use macros to trim code
2368
2369 @cindex trimming language-dependent code
2370 The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2371 languages. If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2372 @var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2373 macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it. Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2374 leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2375 using your language.
2376
2377 Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2378 is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2379 compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2380
2381 See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2382 for different languages.
2383
2384 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2385
2386 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2387 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2388 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2389 distribution!
2390 @end table
2391
2392
2393 @node Host Definition
2394
2395 @chapter Host Definition
2396
2397 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2398 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2399 mainly, as an historical reference.
2400
2401 @section Adding a New Host
2402
2403 @cindex adding a new host
2404 @cindex host, adding
2405 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2406 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2407 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2408 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2409 eventually disappear.
2410
2411 @table @file
2412 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2413 This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2414 (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}. The host
2415 configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2416
2417 Host configuration information included a definition of
2418 @code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2419 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2420 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2421
2422 New host only configurations do not need this file.
2423
2424 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2425 This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2426 gdb on machine @var{xyz}. Those definitions and includes are now
2427 handled by Autoconf.
2428
2429 New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2430
2431 @emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2432 file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2433 @var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}. That code
2434 also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2435
2436 @end table
2437
2438 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2439
2440 @cindex generic host support
2441 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2442 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
2443 defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
2444 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2445 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2446
2447 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2448 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2449 Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2450 into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2451
2452 @table @file
2453 @cindex remote debugging support
2454 @cindex serial line support
2455 @item ser-unix.c
2456 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. This is always
2457 included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2458 variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2459
2460 @item ser-go32.c
2461 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2462 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2463
2464 @cindex TCP remote support
2465 @item ser-tcp.c
2466 This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2467 @end table
2468
2469 @section Host Conditionals
2470
2471 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2472 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2473 attributes of the host system. These macros and their meanings (or if
2474 the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2475 they are used is indicated) are:
2476
2477 @ftable @code
2478 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2479 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2480 @file{.gdbinit}).
2481
2482 @item NO_STD_REGS
2483 This macro is deprecated.
2484
2485 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2486 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2487 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2488
2489 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2490 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2491 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2492
2493 @item ALIGN_STACK_ON_STARTUP
2494 @cindex stack alignment
2495 Define this if your system is of a sort that will crash in
2496 @code{tgetent} if the stack happens not to be longword-aligned when
2497 @code{main} is called. This is a rare situation, but is known to occur
2498 on several different types of systems.
2499
2500 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2501 @cindex DOS text files
2502 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2503 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2504 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2505 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2506 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2507
2508 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2509 @cindex prompt
2510 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2511
2512 @item DEV_TTY
2513 @cindex terminal device
2514 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2515
2516 @item FOPEN_RB
2517 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2518
2519 @item HAVE_MMAP
2520 @findex mmap
2521 In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2522 tables. For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2523
2524 @item HAVE_TERMIO
2525 Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2526
2527 @item INT_MAX
2528 @itemx INT_MIN
2529 @itemx LONG_MAX
2530 @itemx UINT_MAX
2531 @itemx ULONG_MAX
2532 Values for host-side constants.
2533
2534 @item ISATTY
2535 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2536
2537 @item LONGEST
2538 This is the longest integer type available on the host. If not defined,
2539 it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2540 @code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2541
2542 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2543 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2544 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2545 by the @code{configure} script.
2546
2547 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2548 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2549 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2550 @code{configure} script.
2551
2552 @item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2553 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}. This is
2554 set by the @code{configure} script.
2555
2556 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2557 Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2558 numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}. This is
2559 set by the @code{configure} script.
2560
2561 @item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2562 Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2563 float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2564 @code{Lg}. This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2565
2566 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2567 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2568 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2569 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2570
2571 @item L_SET
2572 This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2573 @code{bfd_seek}). FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2574 which is the POSIX equivalent.
2575
2576 @item NORETURN
2577 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2578 that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2579 indicate that they never return. The default is already set correctly
2580 if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be defined.
2581
2582 @item ATTR_NORETURN
2583 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2584 @code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2585 of functions to indicate that they never return. The default is already
2586 set correctly if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be
2587 defined.
2588
2589 @item SEEK_CUR
2590 @itemx SEEK_SET
2591 Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2592 defined.
2593
2594 @item STOP_SIGNAL
2595 This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}. Defaults to
2596 @code{SIGTSTP}. (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2597
2598 @item USG
2599 Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use. (FIXME:
2600 This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2601 @file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2602
2603 @item lint
2604 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2605
2606 @item volatile
2607 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2608 @code{/**/}.
2609 @end ftable
2610
2611
2612 @node Target Architecture Definition
2613
2614 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2615
2616 @cindex target architecture definition
2617 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2618 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2619 with them.
2620
2621 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2622 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2623 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2624
2625 @menu
2626 * OS ABI Variant Handling::
2627 * Initialize New Architecture::
2628 * Registers and Memory::
2629 * Pointers and Addresses::
2630 * Address Classes::
2631 * Raw and Virtual Registers::
2632 * Register and Memory Data::
2633 * Frame Interpretation::
2634 * Inferior Call Setup::
2635 * Compiler Characteristics::
2636 * Target Conditionals::
2637 * Adding a New Target::
2638 @end menu
2639
2640 @node OS ABI Variant Handling
2641 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2642 @cindex OS ABI variants
2643
2644 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2645 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2646 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2647 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2648
2649 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2650 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2651 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2652 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2653 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2654 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2655 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2656 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2657 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2658 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2659 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2660
2661 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2662 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2663 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2664 for each BFD architecture.
2665
2666 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2667
2668 @table @code
2669
2670 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2671 @item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2672 Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2673
2674 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2675 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2676 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2677 settings for the architecture will be used.
2678
2679 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2680 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2681 UNIX System V Release 4.
2682
2683 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2684 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2685 GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2686
2687 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2688 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2689 Sun Solaris.
2690
2691 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2692 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2693 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2694
2695 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2696 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2697 GNU using the Linux kernel.
2698
2699 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2700 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2701 FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2702
2703 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2704 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2705 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2706
2707 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2708 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2709 NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2710
2711 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2712 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2713 NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2714
2715 @findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2716 @item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2717 OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2718
2719 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2720 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2721 Windows CE.
2722
2723 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2724 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2725 DJGPP.
2726
2727 @findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2728 @item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2729 Irix.
2730
2731 @findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2732 @item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2733 Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2734
2735 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2736 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2737 HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2738
2739 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2740 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2741 HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2742
2743 @findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2744 @item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2745 QNX Neutrino.
2746
2747 @findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2748 @item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2749 Cygwin.
2750
2751 @findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2752 @item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2753 AIX.
2754
2755 @end table
2756
2757 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2758
2759 @deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2760 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2761 @end deftypefun
2762
2763 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2764 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2765 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2766 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2767 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2768 will suffice.
2769 @end deftypefun
2770
2771 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2772 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2773 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2774 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2775 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2776 any architecture.
2777 @end deftypefun
2778
2779 @deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2780 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2781 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2782 be determined.
2783 @end deftypefun
2784
2785 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2786 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2787 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2788 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2789 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2790 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2791 @end deftypefun
2792
2793 @deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2794 Helper routine for ELF file sniffers. Examine the file described by
2795 @var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2796 from the note. This function should be called via
2797 @code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2798 @end deftypefun
2799
2800 @node Initialize New Architecture
2801 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2802
2803 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2804 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant. The @code{gdbarch} is
2805 registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2806 the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2807 be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments
2808 are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2809
2810 The initialization function has this type:
2811
2812 @smallexample
2813 static struct gdbarch *
2814 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2815 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2816 @end smallexample
2817
2818 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2819 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2820 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2821 value.
2822
2823 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2824 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
2825 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2826 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2827 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2828
2829 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2830 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2831 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2832 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2833 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2834 defaults from @var{arches}.
2835
2836 @node Registers and Memory
2837 @section Registers and Memory
2838
2839 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2840 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2841 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
2842
2843 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2844 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2845 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
2846 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2847 and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
2848
2849 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2850
2851 @node Pointers and Addresses
2852 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2853 @cindex pointer representation
2854 @cindex address representation
2855 @cindex word-addressed machines
2856 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
2857 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2858 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2859 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2860 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2861 @cindex D10V addresses
2862
2863 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2864 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2865 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
2866 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2867 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2868 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2869 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2870
2871 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2872 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2873 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
2874 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2875 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2876 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2877 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2878 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2879 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2880 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
2881 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2882 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2883 code space.
2884
2885 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2886 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2887 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2888 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2889
2890 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2891 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2892 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2893
2894 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2895 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2896 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2897 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
2898 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2899 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2900 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2901 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2902
2903 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2904 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
2905 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2906 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2907 clean up some architecture-independent code.
2908
2909 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2910
2911 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2912 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2913 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2914 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
2915 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
2916 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2917 inferior's.
2918
2919 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2920 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2921 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
2922 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2923 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2924
2925 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2926 will signal an internal error.
2927 @end deftypefun
2928
2929 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2930 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2931 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
2932 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2933 inferior's.
2934
2935 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2936 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2937 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
2938 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2939 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2940
2941 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2942 will signal an internal error.
2943 @end deftypefun
2944
2945 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2946 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2947 as appropriate for the current architecture.
2948
2949 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2950 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2951 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2952 @end deftypefun
2953
2954 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2955 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2956 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2957 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2958 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2959 @end deftypefun
2960
2961 Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
2962 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
2963 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2964 simple unsigned byte addresses.
2965
2966 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2967 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2968 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
2969 address the pointer refers to.
2970
2971 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2972 C@t{++} reference type.
2973 @end deftypefun
2974
2975 @deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2976 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2977 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2978
2979 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2980 C@t{++} reference type.
2981 @end deftypefun
2982
2983 @node Address Classes
2984 @section Address Classes
2985 @cindex address classes
2986 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2987 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
2988
2989 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2990 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
2991 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
2992 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2993 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2994 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2995 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2996 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2997 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2998
2999 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3000 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3001 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3002 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
3003 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
3004 @end deftypefun
3005
3006 @deftypefun char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3007 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3008 its name.
3009 @end deftypefun
3010 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
3011 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3012 for that address class qualifier.
3013 @end deftypefun
3014
3015 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3016 the address class functions are defined by default. Predicate
3017 functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3018
3019 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3020 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
3021 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3022 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3023 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
3024 to implement the address class functions:
3025
3026 @smallexample
3027 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3028 int dwarf2_addr_class)
3029 @{
3030 if (byte_size == 2)
3031 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3032 else
3033 return 0;
3034 @}
3035
3036 static char *
3037 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3038 @{
3039 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3040 return "short";
3041 else
3042 return NULL;
3043 @}
3044
3045 int
3046 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3047 int *type_flags_ptr)
3048 @{
3049 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3050 @{
3051 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3052 return 1;
3053 @}
3054 else
3055 return 0;
3056 @}
3057 @end smallexample
3058
3059 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3060 to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers. E.g, if
3061 the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
3062 short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
3063
3064 @smallexample
3065 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3066 type = int * @@short
3067 @end smallexample
3068
3069
3070 @node Raw and Virtual Registers
3071 @section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
3072 @cindex raw register representation
3073 @cindex virtual register representation
3074 @cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
3075
3076 @emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete. The
3077 functionality described here has largely been replaced by
3078 pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
3079 Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3080 Representations}. See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3081 Bug Tracking Database} and
3082 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3083 up-to-date information.}
3084
3085 Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3086 register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3087 In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3088 the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3089 used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3090
3091 @emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3092 both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3093 register forms.}
3094
3095 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3096 raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3097 However, they do occasionally differ. For example:
3098
3099 @itemize @bullet
3100 @item
3101 The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type. However, when
3102 we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3103 floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3104 are unused. This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3105 allowing more efficient access. Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3106 type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3107 arrangement is the virtual representation.
3108
3109 @item
3110 Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3111 registers, with garbage in their upper bits. @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3112 bits. Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3113 raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3114 virtual representation.
3115 @end itemize
3116
3117 In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3118 @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3119 can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience. @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3120 @code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3121 @value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3122
3123 Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3124 conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3125
3126 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3127 Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3128 and virtual formats.
3129
3130 You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3131 unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3132 @end deftypefn
3133
3134 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3135 The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value. This is the number
3136 of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3137 remote protocol packet.
3138 @end deftypefn
3139
3140 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3141 The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3142 This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3143 register's value.
3144 @end deftypefn
3145
3146 @deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3147 This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3148 @var{reg}. Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3149 register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3150 always uses the virtual form.
3151 @end deftypefn
3152
3153 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3154 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3155 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3156 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3157 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3158
3159 Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3160 @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3161 arguments in different orders.
3162
3163 You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3164 for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3165 value.
3166 @end deftypefn
3167
3168 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3169 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3170 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3171 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3172 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3173
3174 Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3175 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3176 @end deftypefn
3177
3178
3179 @node Register and Memory Data
3180 @section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3181 @cindex register representation
3182 @cindex memory representation
3183 @cindex representations, register and memory
3184 @cindex register data formats, converting
3185 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3186
3187 @emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3188 significant change. Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3189 section are likely to be subject to further revision. See
3190 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3191 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3192 further information. cagney/2002-05-06.}
3193
3194 Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3195 form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3196 For example:
3197
3198 @itemize @bullet
3199
3200 @item
3201 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3202 floating-point registers.
3203
3204 @item
3205 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3206 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3207 when stored in a register.
3208
3209 @end itemize
3210
3211 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3212 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3213 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3214 Interface.
3215
3216 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3217 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3218 However, they do occasionally differ. Your architecture may define the
3219 following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3220 representations of a data type:
3221
3222 @deftypefun int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3223 Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3224 register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3225 when stored in memory.
3226
3227 When non-zero, the macros @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3228 @code{value_to_register} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3229
3230 This function should return zero for the register's native type, when
3231 no conversion is necessary.
3232 @end deftypefun
3233
3234 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3235 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3236 @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3237 format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3238
3239 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3240 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3241
3242 You should only use @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} with registers for which
3243 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3244 @end deftypefun
3245
3246 @deftypefun void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3247 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3248 raw format.
3249
3250 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3251 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3252
3253 You should only use @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} with registers for which
3254 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3255 @end deftypefun
3256
3257 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3258 See @file{mips-tdep.c}. It does not do what you want.
3259 @end deftypefn
3260
3261 @node Frame Interpretation
3262 @section Frame Interpretation
3263
3264 @node Inferior Call Setup
3265 @section Inferior Call Setup
3266
3267 @node Compiler Characteristics
3268 @section Compiler Characteristics
3269
3270 @node Target Conditionals
3271 @section Target Conditionals
3272
3273 This section describes the macros and functions that you can use to define the
3274 target machine.
3275
3276 @table @code
3277
3278 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3279 @findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
3280 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3281 really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
3282 @var{addr}. This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
3283 in all contexts.
3284
3285 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3286 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3287 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3288 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3289 address of the instruction. @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
3290 example look like that:
3291 @smallexample
3292 arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
3293 @{
3294 return (addr &= ~0x3);
3295 @}
3296 @end smallexample
3297
3298 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3299 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
3300 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3301 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3302 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3303 return 0.
3304
3305 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3306 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3307 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3308 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3309
3310 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3311 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
3312 Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
3313 has been defined.
3314
3315 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3316 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
3317 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3318 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3319 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
3320 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3321 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3322 values or'd together.
3323 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3324
3325 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3326 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
3327 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
3328 been defined.
3329
3330 @item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
3331 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
3332 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3333 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3334
3335 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
3336 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
3337 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
3338 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3339
3340 @item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3341 @findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
3342 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3343 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3344 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3345 C@t{++} reference type.
3346 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3347
3348 @item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
3349 @findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
3350 Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3351 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3352 original type, rather than the promoted type.
3353
3354 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3355 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3356 Define this if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match the
3357 endianness of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
3358 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3359
3360 @item BREAKPOINT
3361 @findex BREAKPOINT
3362 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3363 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
3364 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3365 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
3366 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3367
3368 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3369 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3370
3371 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3372 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3373 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3374 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3375 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3376
3377 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3378 favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3379
3380 @item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3381 @findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
3382 @anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
3383 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
3384 a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3385 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3386 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3387 breakpoint should be inserted.
3388
3389 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3390 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3391 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3392 instruction of the architecture.
3393
3394 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3395
3396 @item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3397 @itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3398 @findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
3399 @findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
3400 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
3401 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3402 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3403 provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
3404 architectures. Architectures which may want to set
3405 @code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3406 conventional manner.
3407
3408 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3409 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3410 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
3411 reason.
3412
3413 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
3414 @findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
3415 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3416 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3417 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3418 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
3419
3420 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3421 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3422 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3423 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
3424 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3425 in parallel.
3426
3427 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3428 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
3429 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3430 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
3431 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3432 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3433 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3434 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3435 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3436 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3437
3438 The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
3439 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3440 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3441
3442 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3443 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3444 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3445
3446 @item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
3447 @findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
3448 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3449
3450 This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
3451 (@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
3452
3453 @item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
3454 @findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
3455 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3456 from an inferior process. This is only relevant if
3457 @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3458
3459 @item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
3460 @findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
3461 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3462 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
3463 status words, and other special registers. This function returns 0 as
3464 default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3465
3466 @item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
3467 @findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
3468 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
3469 @var{type} in a non-standard form.
3470 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3471
3472 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
3473 @findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
3474 This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3475 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
3476 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
3477
3478 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3479 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3480 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3481 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3482
3483 @item void gdbarch_print_float_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3484 @findex gdbarch_print_float_info
3485 If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3486 the processor's floating point unit.
3487
3488 @item void gdbarch_print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3489 @findex gdbarch_print_registers_info
3490 If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3491 specified @var{frame}. If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3492 either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3493 registers (@var{all} is zero).
3494
3495 The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3496 zero omits floating-point registers.
3497
3498 @item int gdbarch_print_vector_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3499 @findex gdbarch_print_vector_info
3500 If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3501 to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3502
3503 By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3504 registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3505
3506 @item int gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf_regnr})
3507 @findex gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum
3508 Convert DWARF register number @var{dwarf_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3509 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3510
3511 @item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
3512 @findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
3513 Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
3514 If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3515
3516 @item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
3517 @findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
3518 Convert ECOFF register number @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3519 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3520
3521 @item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3522 @findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3523 If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3524 macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3525
3526 This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3527 is not defined.
3528
3529 @item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3530 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3531 Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3532 represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3533 Otherwise return 0.
3534
3535 @item CORE_ADDR frame_align (@var{gdbarch}, @var{address})
3536 @anchor{frame_align}
3537 @findex frame_align
3538 Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3539 requirements for the start of a new stack frame. A stack frame's
3540 alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3541 stack alignment requirements.
3542
3543 This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3544 the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3545 value are correctly aligned.
3546
3547 This function always adjusts the address in the direction of stack
3548 growth.
3549
3550 By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3551
3552 @item int gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size (@var{gdbarch})
3553 @findex gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size
3554 The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3555 @sc{abi}. A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3556 allocating extra stack space).
3557
3558 When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3559 modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3560 @var{gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3561 stack.
3562
3563 By default, zero bytes are allocated. The value must be aligned
3564 (@pxref{frame_align}).
3565
3566 The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3567 @emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3568 @cindex red zone
3569
3570 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3571 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3572 Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3573
3574 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3575 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3576 Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3577 outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise. Most normal
3578 situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3579 chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3580 startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3581 @code{_start}.
3582
3583 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3584 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3585 See @file{frame.h}. Determines the address of all registers in the
3586 current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}. Space for
3587 @code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3588 @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3589 @code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3590
3591 @code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3592
3593 @item int gdbarch_frame_num_args (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
3594 @findex gdbarch_frame_num_args
3595 For the frame described by @var{frame} return the number of arguments that
3596 are being passed. If the number of arguments is not known, return
3597 @code{-1}.
3598
3599 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3600 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3601 @anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3602 saved there. This is the return address.
3603
3604 This method is deprecated. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_pc}.
3605
3606 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_pc (@var{next_frame})
3607 @findex gdbarch_unwind_pc
3608 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in
3609 @var{next_frame}'s caller, at which execution will resume after
3610 @var{next_frame} returns. This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3611
3612 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3613 is typically no more than:
3614
3615 @smallexample
3616 ULONGEST pc;
3617 pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_PC_REGNUM);
3618 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
3619 @end smallexample
3620
3621 @noindent
3622 @xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3623
3624 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_sp (@var{gdbarch}, @var{next_frame})
3625 @findex gdbarch_unwind_sp
3626 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address. This is
3627 commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3628
3629 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3630 is typically no more than:
3631
3632 @smallexample
3633 ULONGEST sp;
3634 sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_SP_REGNUM);
3635 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
3636 @end smallexample
3637
3638 @noindent
3639 @xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3640
3641 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3642 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3643 For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3644 function end symbol is 0. For such targets, you must define
3645 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3646 function's epilogue.
3647
3648 @item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3649 @findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3650 An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3651 used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3652 function's first genuine instruction.
3653
3654 This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3655 the address of its first instruction. However, on the VAX, for
3656 example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3657 indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function. The
3658 VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3659 appropriate registers automatically. Thus, since the offset from the
3660 function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3661 @code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3662
3663 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3664 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3665 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3666 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3667 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3668 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
3669 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3670 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3671
3672 @item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3673 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3674 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
3675 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3676 the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3677
3678 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3679 assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint. It takes a
3680 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3681 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3682
3683 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3684 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3685 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
3686 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3687 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in a haste and we are
3688 repenting at leisure.
3689
3690 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3691 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3692 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3693
3694 @item int gdbarch_inner_than (@var{gdbarch}, @var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3695 @findex gdbarch_inner_than
3696 Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3697 stack top) stack address @var{rhs}. Let the function return
3698 @w{@code{lhs < rhs}} if the target's stack grows downward in memory, or
3699 @w{@code{lhs > rsh}} if the stack grows upward.
3700
3701 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3702 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3703 Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
3704 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3705 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3706 final `return from function call' instruction.
3707
3708 @item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
3709 @findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
3710 Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3711 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3712
3713 @item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3714 @findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3715 Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3716 dynamic linker.
3717
3718 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3719 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3720 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3721 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3722 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3723 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3724 stepping will suffice.
3725
3726 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3727 @findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
3728 @cindex converting integers to addresses
3729 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3730 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
3731 the current architectures conventions.
3732
3733 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3734 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3735 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3736 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
3737 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
3738 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3739 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
3740 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3741 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3742 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
3743 method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
3744 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3745
3746 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3747 Addresses}.
3748
3749 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3750 @findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
3751 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3752 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3753 address the pointer refers to.
3754 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3755
3756 @item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
3757 @findex gdbarch_register_to_value
3758 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3759 @var{type}.
3760 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3761
3762 @item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3763 @findex register_reggroup_p
3764 @cindex register groups
3765 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3766 group @var{reggroup}.
3767
3768 By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3769
3770 @table @code
3771 @item float_reggroup
3772 Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3773 @item vector_reggroup
3774 Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3775 @item general_reggroup
3776 Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3777 floating-point. @samp{float_reggroup}.
3778 @item save_reggroup
3779 @itemx restore_reggroup
3780 @itemx all_reggroup
3781 Any register with a valid name.
3782 @end table
3783
3784 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3785 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3786 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3787 register's virtual type.
3788 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3789 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3790
3791 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3792 @findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3793 Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3794 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3795
3796 @item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3797 @findex register_type
3798 If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}. This function
3799 supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}. @xref{Target Architecture
3800 Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3801
3802 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3803 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3804 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3805 form.
3806 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3807
3808 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3809 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3810 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3811 form.
3812 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3813
3814 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3815 @findex regset_from_core_section
3816 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3817 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3818
3819 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3820 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3821 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3822 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3823
3824 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3825 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3826 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3827 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3828 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3829 for examples.
3830
3831 @item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
3832 @findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
3833 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3834 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3835 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3836 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3837 linking faster.
3838
3839 Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
3840 argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
3841 are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
3842 debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
3843 addresses of compilation units in the text segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs
3844 mark the starts and ends of functions.
3845
3846 In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
3847
3848 @itemize @bullet
3849 @item
3850 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead of using those
3851 addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
3852 taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
3853 minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab
3854 has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
3855 that carries the address.
3856
3857 @item
3858 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
3859 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
3860 guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
3861 @end itemize
3862
3863 @item int gdbarch_pc_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3864 @findex gdbarch_pc_regnum
3865 If the program counter is kept in a register, then let this function return
3866 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3867
3868 This should only need to be defined if @code{gdbarch_read_pc} and
3869 @code{gdbarch_write_pc} are not defined.
3870
3871 @item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3872 @findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
3873 @anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
3874 nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
3875 instead of value.
3876
3877 @item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3878 @findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3879 A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3880
3881 @item gdbarch_ps_regnum (@var{gdbarch}
3882 @findex gdbarch_ps_regnum
3883 If defined, this function returns the number of the processor status
3884 register.
3885 (This definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3886
3887 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3888 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
3889 @findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3890 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3891 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
3892 code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
3893 the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3894
3895 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3896 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3897
3898 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3899
3900 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3901
3902 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
3903 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
3904 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3905 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3906 called function should return.
3907
3908 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3909 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3910 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3911
3912 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3913 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3914 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3915
3916 This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}} and
3917 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3918
3919 @item const char *gdbarch_register_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnr})
3920 @findex gdbarch_register_name
3921 Return the name of register @var{regnr} as a string. May return @code{NULL}
3922 to indicate that @var{regnr} is not a valid register.
3923
3924 @item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3925 @findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3926 @anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3927 notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3928 passed to the inferior code. This is the value of the @code{SP}
3929 after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3930 allocated on the stack. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id}.
3931
3932 @item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
3933 @findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
3934 Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
3935 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
3936
3937 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3938 @findex gdbarch_return_value
3939 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3940 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3941 would use.
3942
3943 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3944 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3945 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3946 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3947 passed in as the function's first parameter.
3948
3949 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
3950 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
3951 @var{regcache}.
3952
3953 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
3954 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
3955 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
3956 just returned function).
3957
3958 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
3959 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
3960 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
3961 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
3962 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
3963 return-value extract and store.}
3964
3965 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
3966 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
3967 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
3968 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
3969 @var{function} should be pursued.}
3970
3971 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
3972 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
3973 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
3974 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
3975
3976 @item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
3977 @findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
3978 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
3979 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
3980 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
3981 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
3982 doesn't work. Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
3983 processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
3984 This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
3985 of a branch or jump.
3986
3987 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_prologue (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ip})
3988 @findex gdbarch_skip_prologue
3989 A function that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
3990 function entry prologue found at @var{ip}.
3991
3992 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
3993 @findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
3994 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
3995 the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
3996 that is at the start of the real function.
3997
3998 @item int gdbarch_sp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3999 @findex gdbarch_sp_regnum
4000 If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then use this function to return
4001 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
4002 there is no such register.
4003
4004 @item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4005 @findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4006 Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4007 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4008
4009 @item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4010 @findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4011 The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable. (Never defined in
4012 current sources.)
4013
4014 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4015 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4016 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4017
4018 @item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4019 @findex gdbarch_char_signed
4020 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4021 it should be unsigned.
4022
4023 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4024 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4025 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4026 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4027 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4028
4029 @item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4030 @findex gdbarch_double_bit
4031 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4032
4033 @item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4034 @findex gdbarch_float_bit
4035 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4036
4037 @item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4038 @findex gdbarch_int_bit
4039 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4040
4041 @item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4042 @findex gdbarch_long_bit
4043 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4044
4045 @item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4046 @findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4047 Number of bits in a long double float;
4048 defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4049
4050 @item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4051 @findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4052 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4053 @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4054
4055 @item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4056 @findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4057 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4058 @w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4059
4060 @item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4061 @findex gdbarch_short_bit
4062 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4063
4064 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_read_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4065 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4066 @itemx gdbarch_write_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache}, @var{val})
4067 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4068 @anchor{gdbarch_write_pc}
4069 @itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4070 @findex TARGET_READ_SP
4071 @itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4072 @findex TARGET_READ_FP
4073 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4074 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4075 @findex read_sp
4076 @findex read_fp
4077 @anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{gdbarch_read_pc},
4078 @code{gdbarch_write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}. For most targets, these may be
4079 left undefined. @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4080 functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4081
4082 These macros and functions are useful when a target keeps one of these
4083 registers in a hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register
4084 and part in an ordinary register.
4085
4086 @xref{gdbarch_unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4087
4088 @item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4089 @findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4090 Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4091 pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame pointers
4092 are not used, a default definition simply returns
4093 @code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4094
4095 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4096 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4097 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4098 other related macros.
4099
4100 @item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4101 @findex gdbarch_print_insn
4102 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4103 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4104 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes. If
4105 a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4106 accessor function for the global pointer
4107 @code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}. This usually points to a function in
4108 the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4109 @var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4110 @file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4111 decoding routine.
4112
4113 @item frame_id gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
4114 @findex gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id
4115 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
4116 frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4117 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4118 previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4119 @xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4120
4121 @item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4122 @findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4123 If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4124 given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4125 allocated for it on the stack. @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4126 being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4127 for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4128 other compilers.
4129
4130 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4131 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4132
4133 @item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4134 @findex gdbarch_value_to_register
4135 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
4136 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4137
4138 @end table
4139
4140 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4141
4142 @ftable @code
4143 @item BPT_VECTOR
4144 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
4145 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4146
4147 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4148 Defaults to @code{1}.
4149
4150 @item const char *gdbarch_name_of_malloc (@var{gdbarch})
4151 @findex gdbarch_name_of_malloc
4152 A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4153 allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4154
4155 @end ftable
4156
4157 @node Adding a New Target
4158 @section Adding a New Target
4159
4160 @cindex adding a target
4161 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4162
4163 @table @file
4164 @vindex TDEPFILES
4165 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4166 Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target. Specifies what
4167 object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4168 @samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}. Also specifies
4169 the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4170 tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4171
4172 You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4173 but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4174 future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4175
4176 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4177 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
4178 some machines it doesn't exist at all. Sometimes the macros in
4179 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4180 as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4181 function. This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4182 and debug.
4183
4184 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4185 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4186 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4187 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4188 @file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use
4189 the same processor.
4190
4191 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4192 (@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains
4193 macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4194 format and instructions.
4195
4196 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4197
4198 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4199 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4200 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4201 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use the
4202 same processor.
4203
4204 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4205
4206 @end table
4207
4208 If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4209 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4210 facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4211 instruction needed; etc.). Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4212 that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4213 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4214
4215 @node Target Descriptions
4216 @chapter Target Descriptions
4217 @cindex target descriptions
4218
4219 The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
4220 contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture. For
4221 some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
4222 instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
4223 @dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
4224 more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
4225 directly.
4226
4227 For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
4228 target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
4229 Debugging with @value{GDBN}}. This section will cover some related
4230 topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
4231
4232 @menu
4233 * Target Descriptions Implementation::
4234 * Adding Target Described Register Support::
4235 @end menu
4236
4237 @node Target Descriptions Implementation
4238 @section Target Descriptions Implementation
4239 @cindex target descriptions, implementation
4240
4241 Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
4242 an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
4243 reverts to a default gdbarch. Then, after connecting, it looks for a
4244 new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
4245
4246 A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
4247 @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
4248 @code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector. For instance,
4249 the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
4250 64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
4251
4252 If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
4253 incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}. Any
4254 @samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
4255 architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
4256 new architecture. Then the initialization routine is called, and has
4257 a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
4258 of the target description. For instance, it can recognize any
4259 properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine. Also
4260 see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
4261
4262 @node Adding Target Described Register Support
4263 @section Adding Target Described Register Support
4264 @cindex target descriptions, adding register support
4265
4266 Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
4267 instance of the target. But it takes a little work in the architecture
4268 specific routines to support this.
4269
4270 A target description must either have no registers or a complete
4271 set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
4272 with the target defined registers. It is the architecture's
4273 responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
4274 everything it needs. To keep architecture code simple, the same
4275 mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
4276 standard registers.
4277
4278 If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
4279 registers. The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
4280
4281 @itemize @bullet
4282
4283 @item
4284 Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
4285 searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
4286
4287 @item
4288 Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
4289
4290 @item
4291 Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
4292 to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
4293
4294 @item
4295 Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
4296 feature is missing expected registers. This will produce a warning that
4297 the description was incomplete.
4298
4299 @item
4300 Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
4301 is called.
4302
4303 @item
4304 Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
4305 fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
4306
4307 @item
4308 Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
4309 returning it.
4310
4311 @end itemize
4312
4313 After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
4314 @code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
4315 routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
4316 the target description. @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
4317 for any additional registers in the description.
4318
4319 Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
4320
4321 @itemize @bullet
4322
4323 @item
4324 Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
4325 constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
4326 as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}. But because
4327 pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
4328 which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
4329 can not be used for pseudos. They must be numbered relative to
4330 @code{num_regs} instead.
4331
4332 @item
4333 The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
4334 architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
4335 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
4336 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
4337 describing pseudo registers. These routines will be passed
4338 internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
4339 gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
4340
4341 @end itemize
4342
4343
4344 @node Target Vector Definition
4345
4346 @chapter Target Vector Definition
4347 @cindex target vector
4348
4349 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4350 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4351 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4352 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4353 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4354
4355 @menu
4356 * Managing Execution State::
4357 * Existing Targets::
4358 @end menu
4359
4360 @node Managing Execution State
4361 @section Managing Execution State
4362 @cindex execution state
4363
4364 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4365 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4366 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4367 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4368 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4369 when the target has exited or not yet started.
4370
4371 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4372 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
4373 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4374 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4375 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4376 are directed to the simulator.
4377
4378 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4379 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4380 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4381 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4382
4383 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4384 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4385 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
4386 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4387 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4388 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4389 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4390 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4391 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4392 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
4393 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4394 target to inactive state.
4395
4396 @node Existing Targets
4397 @section Existing Targets
4398 @cindex targets
4399
4400 @subsection File Targets
4401
4402 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4403
4404 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4405
4406 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4407 that runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4408 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4409 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4410
4411 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4412 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4413 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4414 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4415
4416 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4417 @code{trap_low}:
4418
4419 @enumerate
4420 @item
4421 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4422
4423 @item
4424 traps are disabled;
4425
4426 @item
4427 you are in the correct trap window.
4428 @end enumerate
4429
4430 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4431 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4432 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4433 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4434 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
4435 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4436 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4437
4438 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4439 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4440 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
4441 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
4442 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
4443 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4444 of the debugger/stub.
4445
4446 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4447 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4448
4449 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4450
4451 @subsection Custom Protocols
4452
4453 @subsection Transport Layer
4454
4455 @subsection Builtin Simulator
4456
4457
4458 @node Native Debugging
4459
4460 @chapter Native Debugging
4461 @cindex native debugging
4462
4463 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4464
4465 @table @file
4466 @vindex NATDEPFILES
4467 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4468 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4469 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
4470 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4471 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4472 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
4473 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4474 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4475
4476 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4477 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4478 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
4479 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
4480 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4481 suffix.}
4482
4483 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4484 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
4485 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4486 child process control and core file support.
4487
4488 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4489 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4490 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4491 @end table
4492
4493 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4494 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
4495 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
4496 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4497 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4498
4499 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4500 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4501 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4502 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4503
4504 @table @file
4505 @item inftarg.c
4506 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4507 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4508
4509 @item procfs.c
4510 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4511 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4512
4513 @item fork-child.c
4514 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4515 and exec'' to start up a child process.
4516
4517 @item infptrace.c
4518 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4519 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4520 @end table
4521
4522 @section Native core file Support
4523 @cindex native core files
4524
4525 @table @file
4526 @findex fetch_core_registers
4527 @item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4528 Support for reading registers out of a core file. This routine calls
4529 @code{register_addr()}, see below. Now that BFD is used to read core
4530 files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4531 just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4532 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4533
4534 @item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4535 If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4536 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4537 set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4538 register number @code{regno}. @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4539 ``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}. If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4540 @file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4541 use the macro in it. If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4542 you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4543 to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4544 @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4545 the @code{NATDEPFILES} list. If you have your own
4546 @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4547 @code{register_addr()}. Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4548 implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4549 @end table
4550
4551 When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4552 possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4553 code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4554 @file{bfd/trad-core.c}. First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4555 machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4556 (possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4557 @file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4558 exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}). Then
4559 modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4560 section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4561 segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4562 information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4563 sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment. This
4564 section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4565 standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4566 around in.
4567
4568 Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4569 @code{fetch_core_registers}. If you can use the generic one, it's in
4570 @file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4571 It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4572 its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4573 segment, its length, and a 2. The routine should suck out the supplied
4574 register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4575
4576 If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4577 format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4578 reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4579
4580 @section ptrace
4581
4582 @section /proc
4583
4584 @section win32
4585
4586 @section shared libraries
4587
4588 @section Native Conditionals
4589 @cindex native conditionals
4590
4591 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4592 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4593 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
4594 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4595
4596 @table @code
4597
4598 @item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4599 @findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4600 If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4601 define this to ensure that all values are correct. This usually entails
4602 a read from the child.
4603
4604 [Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4605 currently.]
4606
4607 @item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4608 @findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4609 Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4610 @code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4611 @file{@var{host}-nat.c}. If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4612 @file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4613 routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4614
4615 @item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4616 @findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4617 This functions normally returns the number of the first floating
4618 point register, if the machine has such registers. As such, it would
4619 appear only in target-specific code. However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4620 to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4621
4622 @item int gdbarch_get_longjmp_target (@var{gdbarch})
4623 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4624 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
4625 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4626 @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4627
4628 This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4629 assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint. It takes a
4630 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4631 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4632
4633 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4634 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4635 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4636
4637 @item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4638 @findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4639 Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4640 user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4641
4642 @item PROC_NAME_FMT
4643 @findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4644 Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device. Should be
4645 defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4646 definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4647
4648 @item SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4649 @findex SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4650 If defined, is a string to prefix on the shell command used to start the
4651 inferior.
4652
4653 @item SHELL_FILE
4654 @findex SHELL_FILE
4655 If defined, this is the name of the shell to use to run the inferior.
4656 Defaults to @code{"/bin/sh"}.
4657
4658 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4659 @findex SOLIB_ADD
4660 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4661 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4662 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4663 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4664
4665 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4666 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4667 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4668 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4669
4670 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4671 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4672 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4673 twice; once when
4674 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
4675 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4676 expand into the number expected.
4677
4678 @item CLEAR_SOLIB
4679 @findex CLEAR_SOLIB
4680 See @file{objfiles.c}.
4681
4682 @end table
4683
4684 @node Support Libraries
4685
4686 @chapter Support Libraries
4687
4688 @section BFD
4689 @cindex BFD library
4690
4691 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4692
4693 @table @emph
4694 @item identifying executable and core files
4695 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4696 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4697
4698 @item access to sections of files
4699 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4700 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4701 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
4702 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4703 length @var{z}.
4704
4705 @item specialized core file support
4706 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
4707 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
4708 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
4709 file.
4710
4711 @item locating the symbol information
4712 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
4713 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
4714 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
4715 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
4716 string table, etc.
4717 @end table
4718
4719 @section opcodes
4720 @cindex opcodes library
4721
4722 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
4723 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
4724
4725 @section readline
4726 @cindex readline library
4727 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
4728 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
4729
4730 @section libiberty
4731 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
4732
4733 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
4734 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
4735 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
4736 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
4737 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
4738 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
4739 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
4740 beyond standard functions).
4741
4742 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
4743 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
4744 floating format support functions, the input options parser
4745 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
4746
4747 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
4748 @cindex @code{obstacks}
4749
4750 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
4751 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
4752 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
4753 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
4754 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
4755 @code{obstacks}).
4756
4757 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
4758 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
4759 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
4760 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
4761 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
4762 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
4763 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
4764 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
4765 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
4766 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
4767 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
4768 names of types.
4769
4770 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
4771 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
4772 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
4773 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
4774 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
4775 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
4776 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
4777 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
4778 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
4779 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
4780 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
4781 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
4782 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
4783 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
4784 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
4785
4786 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
4787 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
4788 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
4789 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
4790 new symbol file.
4791
4792 @section gnu-regex
4793 @cindex regular expressions library
4794
4795 Regex conditionals.
4796
4797 @table @code
4798 @item C_ALLOCA
4799
4800 @item NFAILURES
4801
4802 @item RE_NREGS
4803
4804 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
4805
4806 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
4807
4808 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
4809
4810 @item Sword
4811
4812 @item sparc
4813 @end table
4814
4815 @section Array Containers
4816 @cindex Array Containers
4817 @cindex VEC
4818
4819 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
4820 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
4821 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
4822 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
4823 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
4824 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
4825
4826 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
4827 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
4828 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
4829 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
4830 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
4831 but implemented in C.
4832
4833 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
4834 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
4835 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
4836 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
4837 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
4838 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
4839 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
4840 elements are returned by value.
4841
4842 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
4843 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
4844 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
4845 the address-of can be optimized away.
4846
4847 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
4848 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
4849 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
4850 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
4851 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
4852 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
4853 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
4854 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
4855 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
4856 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
4857 minimal space in the structure containing them.
4858
4859 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
4860 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
4861 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
4862 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
4863 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
4864 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
4865 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
4866 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
4867 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
4868 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
4869 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
4870 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
4871 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
4872
4873 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
4874 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
4875 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
4876 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
4877 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
4878 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
4879 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
4880 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
4881 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
4882 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
4883
4884 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
4885 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
4886 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
4887 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
4888
4889 Vector types are defined using a
4890 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
4891 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
4892 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
4893 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
4894 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
4895 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
4896 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
4897 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
4898 that is not possible in plain C.
4899
4900 An example of their use would be,
4901
4902 @smallexample
4903 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
4904
4905 struct my_struct @{
4906 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
4907 @};
4908
4909 struct my_struct *s;
4910
4911 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
4912 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
4913 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
4914 @{ do something with elt @}
4915
4916 @end smallexample
4917
4918 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
4919 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
4920
4921 @table @code
4922 @item VEC_length
4923 Return the number of items in the array,
4924
4925 @item VEC_empty
4926 Return true if the array has no elements.
4927
4928 @item VEC_last
4929 @itemx VEC_index
4930 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
4931
4932 @item VEC_iterate
4933 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
4934 traversed.
4935
4936 @item VEC_alloc
4937 @itemx VEC_free
4938 Create and destroy an array.
4939
4940 @item VEC_embedded_size
4941 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
4942 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
4943
4944 @item VEC_copy
4945 Duplicate an array.
4946
4947 @item VEC_space
4948 Return the amount of free space in an array.
4949
4950 @item VEC_reserve
4951 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
4952
4953 @item VEC_quick_push
4954 @itemx VEC_safe_push
4955 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
4956 sure that it is.
4957
4958 @item VEC_pop
4959 Remove the last item from an array.
4960
4961 @item VEC_truncate
4962 Remove several items from the end of an array.
4963
4964 @item VEC_safe_grow
4965 Add several items to the end of an array.
4966
4967 @item VEC_replace
4968 Overwrite an item in the array.
4969
4970 @item VEC_quick_insert
4971 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
4972 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
4973 already exist, or the space is created.
4974
4975 @item VEC_ordered_remove
4976 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
4977 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
4978
4979 @item VEC_block_remove
4980 Remove a set of items from the array.
4981
4982 @item VEC_address
4983 Provide the address of the first element.
4984
4985 @item VEC_lower_bound
4986 Binary search the array.
4987
4988 @end table
4989
4990 @section include
4991
4992 @node Coding
4993
4994 @chapter Coding
4995
4996 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
4997 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
4998
4999 @section Cleanups
5000 @cindex cleanups
5001
5002 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5003 later.
5004
5005 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5006 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5007 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
5008 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5009 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5010 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5011 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5012 created.
5013
5014 Syntax:
5015
5016 @table @code
5017 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5018 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5019
5020 @findex make_cleanup
5021 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5022 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5023 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5024 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5025 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
5026 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5027 from @code{make_cleanup}.
5028
5029 @findex do_cleanups
5030 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5031 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5032 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5033
5034 @findex discard_cleanups
5035 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5036 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5037 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5038 @end table
5039
5040 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
5041 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5042 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5043 performed). E.g.:
5044
5045 @smallexample
5046 make_cleanup (a, 0);
5047 @{
5048 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5049 make_cleanup (c, 0)
5050 ...
5051 do_cleanups (old);
5052 @}
5053 @end smallexample
5054
5055 @noindent
5056 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
5057 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5058 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5059
5060 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5061 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5062 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
5063 to two common cleanup styles.
5064
5065 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5066 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5067 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
5068 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5069 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5070 @code{xfree} will always be called:
5071
5072 @smallexample
5073 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5074 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5075 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5076 ... blah blah ...
5077 do_cleanups (old);
5078 @end smallexample
5079
5080 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5081 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5082 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
5083 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5084 an error:
5085
5086 @smallexample
5087 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5088 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5089 ... blah blah ...
5090 discard_cleanups (old);
5091 return file;
5092 @end smallexample
5093
5094 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5095 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
5096 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5097 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5098 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5099 @samp{longjmp} instead).
5100
5101 @section Per-architecture module data
5102 @cindex per-architecture module data
5103 @cindex multi-arch data
5104 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5105
5106 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5107 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5108 architecture object.
5109
5110 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5111
5112 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5113 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5114 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5115 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5116 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5117 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5118 @end deftypefun
5119
5120 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5121 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5122 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
5123 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5124 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5125 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5126 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5127 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5128 @end deftypefun
5129
5130 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5131 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5132
5133 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5134
5135 @deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5136 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5137 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5138 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5139 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
5140 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5141 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5142 @end deftypefun
5143
5144 The examples below assume the following definitions:
5145
5146 @smallexample
5147 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5148 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5149 @end smallexample
5150
5151 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5152 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
5153 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5154 creation.
5155
5156 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
5157 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5158 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5159
5160 @smallexample
5161 static void *
5162 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5163 @{
5164 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5165 return data;
5166 @}
5167 @end smallexample
5168
5169 @smallexample
5170 extern void
5171 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5172 @{
5173 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5174 data->total = nozel;
5175 @}
5176 @end smallexample
5177
5178 A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5179 using @code{post_init}.
5180
5181 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5182 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5183 architecture.
5184
5185 @smallexample
5186 static void *
5187 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5188 @{
5189 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5190 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5191 return data;
5192 @}
5193 @end smallexample
5194
5195 @smallexample
5196 extern int
5197 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5198 @{
5199 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5200 return data->total;
5201 @}
5202 @end smallexample
5203
5204 @section Wrapping Output Lines
5205 @cindex line wrap in output
5206
5207 @findex wrap_here
5208 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5209 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5210 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
5211 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5212 exceeded.
5213
5214 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5215 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
5216 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
5217 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5218 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
5219 return!
5220
5221 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5222 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5223 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5224 the line wraps there.
5225
5226 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5227 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5228 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
5229 print warnings are a good example.
5230
5231 @section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5232 @cindex coding standards
5233
5234 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5235 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5236 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5237 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5238 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5239
5240 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5241 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5242
5243
5244 @subsection ISO C
5245
5246 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5247 compiler.
5248
5249 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5250
5251
5252 @subsection Memory Management
5253
5254 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5255 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5256
5257 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5258 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5259 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
5260 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
5261 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5262
5263 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5264 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
5265 behavior.}
5266
5267 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5268
5269 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5270 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5271 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5272
5273 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5274 @code{NULL} pointer.}
5275
5276 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5277 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5278
5279 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
5280 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5281
5282 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5283 function @code{xstrprintf}.
5284
5285 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
5286 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5287 errors.}
5288
5289
5290 @subsection Compiler Warnings
5291 @cindex compiler warnings
5292
5293 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5294 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
5295 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
5296 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5297
5298 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5299 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
5300 from those flags are treated as errors.
5301
5302 The current list of warning flags includes:
5303
5304 @table @samp
5305 @item -Wall
5306 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5307
5308 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5309
5310 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5311 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5312
5313 @item -Wpointer-arith
5314
5315 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
5316 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5317 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5318 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5319 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5320 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5321
5322 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
5323 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5324 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5325 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5326 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
5327 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5328 worth the time it would take.
5329
5330 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
5331 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5332 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
5333 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5334 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5335 is being used.
5336
5337 @item -Wno-unused
5338 @itemx -Wno-switch
5339 @itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
5340 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5341 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5342
5343 @end table
5344
5345 @subsection Formatting
5346
5347 @cindex source code formatting
5348 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5349 strictly.
5350
5351 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5352 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5353
5354 @smallexample
5355 /* Declaration */
5356 static void foo (void);
5357 /* Definition */
5358 void
5359 foo (void)
5360 @{
5361 @}
5362 @end smallexample
5363
5364 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5365 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5366
5367 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5368 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5369 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5370 or before a close paren/bracket.
5371
5372 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5373 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5374 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5375 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5376 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5377
5378 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5379
5380 @smallexample
5381 void *foo;
5382 @end smallexample
5383
5384 @noindent
5385 and not:
5386
5387 @smallexample
5388 void * foo;
5389 void* foo;
5390 @end smallexample
5391
5392 @subsection Comments
5393
5394 @cindex comment formatting
5395 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5396
5397 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5398 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5399
5400 @smallexample
5401 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5402 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5403 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5404 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5405 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5406 @end smallexample
5407
5408 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5409 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5410
5411 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5412 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5413
5414 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5415 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5416 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5417 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5418
5419 @subsection C Usage
5420
5421 @cindex C data types
5422 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5423 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5424 of evaluation of expressions.
5425
5426 @cindex function usage
5427 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5428 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5429 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5430 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5431
5432 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5433 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5434
5435 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5436 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5437 protected with parentheses.)
5438
5439 @cindex types
5440
5441 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5442 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5443
5444
5445 @subsection Function Prototypes
5446 @cindex function prototypes
5447
5448 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5449 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5450 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5451 function definition.
5452
5453 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5454 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5455 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5456 visible to random source files.
5457
5458 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5459 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5460
5461
5462 @subsection Internal Error Recovery
5463
5464 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5465 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
5466 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5467 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5468 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5469 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5470
5471 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5472 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5473
5474 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5475
5476 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
5477 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5478 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5479 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5480
5481 @subsection File Names
5482
5483 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5484 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5485 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5486
5487 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5488 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5489 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5490 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5491 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5492 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5493 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5494
5495 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5496 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5497
5498 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5499
5500 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5501 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5502 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5503 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5504 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5505 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5506 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5507
5508 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5509
5510
5511 @subsection Include Files
5512
5513 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5514
5515 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5516 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5517 indirect inclusion.
5518
5519 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5520 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5521 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5522 be directly included.
5523
5524 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5525
5526 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5527 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5528 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5529
5530 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5531
5532 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5533 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5534 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5535
5536 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5537
5538 @smallexample
5539 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5540 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5541 header body
5542 #endif
5543 @end smallexample
5544
5545
5546 @subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5547
5548 @cindex design
5549 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5550 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5551 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5552 trouble.
5553
5554 @cindex assumptions about targets
5555 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5556 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
5557 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5558 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5559 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5560
5561 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5562 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
5563 current @code{target_ops} vector.
5564
5565 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5566 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
5567 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5568 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
5569 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5570 copyright problems.
5571
5572 @cindex portability
5573 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
5574 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5575 systems.
5576
5577 @cindex system dependencies
5578 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5579 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5580 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
5581 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
5582 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5583 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5584 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5585 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5586 with regard to this feature.
5587
5588 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5589 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5590
5591 @cindex portable file name handling
5592 @cindex file names, portability
5593 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5594 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5595 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5596 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5597 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
5598 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
5599 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5600 name, use the following portable macros:
5601
5602 @table @code
5603 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5604 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5605 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5606 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
5607 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5608 such hosts.
5609
5610 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5611 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5612 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5613 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5614 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5615 pass.
5616
5617 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5618 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5619 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5620 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5621 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5622 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5623
5624 @findex FILENAME_CMP
5625 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5626 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5627 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
5628 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5629 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5630
5631 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5632 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5633 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5634 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5635 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5636
5637 @findex SLASH_STRING
5638 @item SLASH_STRING
5639 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5640 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5641 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5642 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5643 @end table
5644
5645 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5646 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
5647 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5648 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5649 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5650 with @code{strrchr}.
5651
5652 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5653 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5654 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5655 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5656 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
5657 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5658 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5659 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5660 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
5661 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5662 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
5663 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5664 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5665
5666 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5667 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5668 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5669 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5670 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5671 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5672 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5673 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5674
5675 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5676 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5677 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
5678 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5679
5680
5681 @node Porting GDB
5682
5683 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5684 @cindex porting to new machines
5685
5686 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5687 specifying the configuration of the machine. This is done in a
5688 dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5689 hope to make more sensible soon. Let's say your new host is called an
5690 @var{xyz} (e.g., @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5691 name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5692 @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}). In particular:
5693
5694 @itemize @bullet
5695 @item
5696 In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5697 @var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5698 vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file. Also, add
5699 @var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5700 @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}. You can test your changes by
5701 running
5702
5703 @smallexample
5704 ./config.sub @var{xyz}
5705 @end smallexample
5706
5707 @noindent
5708 and
5709
5710 @smallexample
5711 ./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5712 @end smallexample
5713
5714 @noindent
5715 which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5716 and no error messages.
5717
5718 @noindent
5719 You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already. Porting BFD is
5720 beyond the scope of this manual.
5721
5722 @item
5723 To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
5724 your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
5725 desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
5726 setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
5727 @var{xyz}).
5728
5729 @emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress. The file
5730 @file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
5731 new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
5732 Recent changes have removed this requirement. The file now only needs
5733 to be modified when adding a new native configuration. This will likely
5734 changed again in the future.}
5735
5736 @item
5737 Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
5738 target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
5739 configuration.
5740 @end itemize
5741
5742 @node Versions and Branches
5743 @chapter Versions and Branches
5744
5745 @section Versions
5746
5747 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
5748 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
5749
5750 @table @asis
5751 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
5752 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
5753 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
5754 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5755 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
5756 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
5757 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
5758 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
5759 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
5760 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
5761 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
5762 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
5763 may include additional changes
5764 @end table
5765
5766 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
5767 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
5768 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
5769 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
5770
5771 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
5772 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
5773 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
5774 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
5775 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
5776 @var{patchlevel}.
5777
5778 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
5779 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
5780
5781 @table @asis
5782 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5783 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
5784 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5785 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5786 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
5787 6.1.90.20020304)
5788 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5789 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5790 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
5791 @end table
5792
5793 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
5794 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
5795 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
5796
5797 @smallexample
5798 <HEAD>
5799 |
5800 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
5801 |
5802 +--------------------------.
5803 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
5804 | |
5805 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
5806 | |
5807 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
5808 | |
5809 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
5810 | |
5811 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
5812 | |
5813 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
5814 | |
5815 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
5816 | |
5817 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
5818 | |
5819 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
5820 |
5821 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
5822 |
5823 +--------------------------.
5824 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
5825 | |
5826 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
5827 | |
5828 @end smallexample
5829
5830 @section Release Branches
5831 @cindex Release Branches
5832
5833 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
5834 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
5835 branch tags:
5836
5837 @smallexample
5838 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
5839 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
5840 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
5841 @end smallexample
5842
5843 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
5844 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
5845 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
5846 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
5847
5848 @section Vendor Branches
5849 @cindex vendor branches
5850
5851 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
5852 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
5853 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
5854 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
5855 Inc Patch 2)}.
5856
5857 @section Experimental Branches
5858 @cindex experimental branches
5859
5860 @subsection Guidelines
5861
5862 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
5863 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
5864 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
5865 significant new developments.
5866
5867 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
5868
5869 @table @emph
5870
5871 @item a branch has an owner
5872 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
5873 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
5874 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
5875
5876 @item all commits are posted
5877 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
5878 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
5879 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
5880 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
5881
5882 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
5883 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
5884 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
5885
5886 @item a branch is focused
5887 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
5888 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
5889 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
5890
5891 @item a branch tracks mainline
5892 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
5893 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
5894 mainline.
5895
5896 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
5897 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
5898 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
5899
5900 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
5901 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
5902 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
5903 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
5904
5905 @end table
5906
5907 @subsection Tags
5908 @anchor{Tags}
5909
5910 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
5911 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
5912
5913 @table @code
5914
5915 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5916 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
5917 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
5918 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
5919 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
5920 @smallexample
5921 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
5922 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
5923 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
5924 @end smallexample
5925
5926 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5927 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
5928 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
5929 use a command sequence like:
5930 @smallexample
5931 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
5932 cvs update \
5933 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5934 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5935 @end smallexample
5936 @noindent
5937 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
5938 merge.
5939
5940 @end table
5941
5942 @noindent
5943 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
5944 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
5945
5946 @node Start of New Year Procedure
5947 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
5948 @cindex new year procedure
5949
5950 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
5951
5952 @itemize @bullet
5953 @item
5954 Rotate the ChangeLog file
5955
5956 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
5957 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
5958 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
5959 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
5960 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
5961 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
5962 @smallexample
5963 Local Variables:
5964 mode: change-log
5965 left-margin: 8
5966 fill-column: 74
5967 version-control: never
5968 End:
5969 @end smallexample
5970
5971 @item
5972 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
5973 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5974
5975 @item
5976 Update the copyright year in the startup message
5977
5978 Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
5979 @code{print_gdb_version}.
5980 @end itemize
5981
5982 @node Releasing GDB
5983
5984 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
5985 @cindex making a new release of gdb
5986
5987 @section Branch Commit Policy
5988
5989 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
5990 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
5991
5992 @itemize @bullet
5993 @item
5994 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
5995 @item
5996 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
5997 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
5998 file is better than committing a hack.
5999 @item
6000 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6001 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6002 when debugging a static binary?
6003 @item
6004 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6005 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6006 @item
6007 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6008 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6009 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6010 @end itemize
6011
6012 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6013 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6014 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6015 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6016
6017
6018 @section Obsoleting code
6019
6020 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6021 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6022 (an old target, an unused file).
6023
6024 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6025 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6026 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6027
6028 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6029 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6030 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6031
6032 @enumerate
6033 @item
6034 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6035 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6036 recommended.
6037 @item
6038 Wait a week or so.
6039 @item
6040 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6041 Announcement mailing list}.
6042 @item
6043 Wait a week or so.
6044 @item
6045 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6046 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6047 @item
6048 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6049 released.
6050 @item
6051 Remove the obsolete code.
6052 @end enumerate
6053
6054 @noindent
6055 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6056 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6057 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6058 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6059 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6060 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6061
6062
6063
6064 @section Before the Branch
6065
6066 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6067 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6068 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6069 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6070 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6071
6072 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6073
6074 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6075 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6076 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6077
6078 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6079
6080 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6081 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6082 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6083
6084 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6085
6086 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6087
6088 @itemize @bullet
6089 @item
6090 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6091 @item
6092 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6093 file)
6094 @item
6095 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6096 @end itemize
6097
6098 @subheading Check the ARI
6099
6100 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6101 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6102 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6103 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6104 regressions.
6105
6106 @subsection Review the bug data base
6107
6108 Close anything obviously fixed.
6109
6110 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6111
6112 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6113
6114
6115 @section Cut the Branch
6116
6117 @subheading Create the branch
6118
6119 @smallexample
6120 $ u=5.1
6121 $ v=5.2
6122 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6123 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6124 $ echo $u $V $D
6125 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6126 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6127 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6128 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6129 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6130 $ ^echo ^^
6131 ...
6132 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6133 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6134 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6135 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6136 $ ^echo ^^
6137 ...
6138 $
6139 @end smallexample
6140
6141 @itemize @bullet
6142 @item
6143 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6144 date/time.
6145 @item
6146 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6147 @item
6148 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6149 @item
6150 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6151 @item
6152 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6153 @end itemize
6154
6155 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6156
6157 @smallexample
6158 $ u=5.1
6159 $ v=5.2
6160 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6161 $ echo $u $v$V
6162 5.1 5_2
6163 $ cd /tmp
6164 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6165 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6166 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6167 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6168 $ ^echo ^^
6169 U src/gdb/version.in
6170 $ cd src/gdb
6171 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6172 $ cat version.in
6173 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6174 $ cvs -f commit version.in
6175 @end smallexample
6176
6177 @itemize @bullet
6178 @item
6179 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6180 mechanism.
6181 @item
6182 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6183 initial branch version number.
6184 @end itemize
6185
6186
6187 @subheading Update the web and news pages
6188
6189 Something?
6190
6191 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6192
6193 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6194 This file needs to be updated so that:
6195
6196 @itemize @bullet
6197 @item
6198 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6199 @item
6200 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6201 @end itemize
6202
6203 @noindent
6204 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6205 cron table.
6206
6207 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6208 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6209 snapshot directories.
6210
6211
6212 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6213
6214 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6215 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6216 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6217
6218 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6219 current release.
6220
6221 @subheading Post the branch info
6222
6223 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6224
6225 @itemize @bullet
6226 @item
6227 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6228 @item
6229 @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6230 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6231 @end itemize
6232
6233 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6234 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6235 list are alerted.}
6236
6237 The announcement should include:
6238
6239 @itemize @bullet
6240 @item
6241 The branch tag.
6242 @item
6243 How to check out the branch using CVS.
6244 @item
6245 The date/number of weeks until the release.
6246 @item
6247 The branch commit policy still holds.
6248 @end itemize
6249
6250 @section Stabilize the branch
6251
6252 Something goes here.
6253
6254 @section Create a Release
6255
6256 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6257 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
6258 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
6259 process of releasing that tar ball.
6260
6261 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6262
6263 @subsection Create a release candidate
6264
6265 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6266 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6267 candidate).
6268
6269 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
6270
6271 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6272 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6273
6274 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6275
6276 @smallexample
6277 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
6278 $ v=5.2
6279 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6280 $ echo $t/$b/$v
6281 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6282 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6283 $ cd $t/$b/$v
6284 $ pwd
6285 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6286 $ which autoconf
6287 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6288 $
6289 @end smallexample
6290
6291 @noindent
6292 Notes:
6293
6294 @itemize @bullet
6295 @item
6296 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
6297 version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6298 found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6299 unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6300 @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6301 @end itemize
6302
6303 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6304
6305 @smallexample
6306 $ for m in gdb insight
6307 do
6308 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6309 done
6310 $
6311 @end smallexample
6312
6313 @noindent
6314 Note:
6315
6316 @itemize @bullet
6317 @item
6318 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6319 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6320 @code{cvs} really does.
6321 @end itemize
6322
6323 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
6324
6325 @table @file
6326
6327 @item gdb/NEWS
6328
6329 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
6330 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6331
6332 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6333
6334 @smallexample
6335 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6336 ...
6337 c-x 4 a
6338 ...
6339 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6340 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6341 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6342 @end smallexample
6343
6344 @item gdb/README
6345
6346 You'll need to update:
6347
6348 @itemize @bullet
6349 @item
6350 The version.
6351 @item
6352 The update date.
6353 @item
6354 Who did it.
6355 @end itemize
6356
6357 @smallexample
6358 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6359 ...
6360 c-x 4 a
6361 ...
6362 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6363 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6364 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6365 @end smallexample
6366
6367 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6368 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6369 to get it updated.}
6370
6371 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6372 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
6373 pursuing.}
6374
6375 @item gdb/version.in
6376
6377 @smallexample
6378 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6379 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6380 5.2
6381 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6382 ...
6383 c-x 4 a
6384 ... Bump to version ...
6385 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6386 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6387 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 @end table
6391
6392 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
6393
6394 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6395
6396 @smallexample
6397 $ for m in gdb insight
6398 do
6399 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6400 done
6401 @end smallexample
6402
6403 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6404 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6405
6406 @smallexample
6407 $ for m in gdb insight
6408 do
6409 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6410 done
6411 @end smallexample
6412
6413 @subsubheading Check the source files
6414
6415 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6416 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
6417 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6418
6419 @smallexample
6420 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6421 M djunpack.bat
6422 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6423 ? proto-toplev
6424 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6425 M gdb/ChangeLog
6426 M gdb/NEWS
6427 M gdb/README
6428 M gdb/version.in
6429 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6430 $
6431 @end smallexample
6432
6433 @noindent
6434 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6435 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6436 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6437 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
6438
6439 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6440
6441 @smallexample
6442 $ cp */src/*.tar .
6443 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
6444 $ ls -F
6445 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6446 $ for m in gdb insight
6447 do
6448 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6449 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6450 done
6451 $
6452 @end smallexample
6453
6454 @noindent
6455 Note:
6456
6457 @itemize @bullet
6458 @item
6459 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6460 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6461 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
6462 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6463 @end itemize
6464
6465 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6466
6467 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6468
6469 @smallexample
6470 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6471 $ cd gdb-5.2
6472 $ ./configure
6473 $ make
6474 @dots{}
6475 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6476 GNU gdb 5.2
6477 @dots{}
6478 (gdb) b main
6479 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6480 (gdb) run
6481 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6482
6483 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6484 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6485 (gdb) print args
6486 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6487 (gdb)
6488 @end smallexample
6489
6490 @subsection Make a release candidate available
6491
6492 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6493
6494 @enumerate
6495 @item
6496 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6497 @item
6498 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6499 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6500 process can restart.
6501 @item
6502 Make the release candidate available in
6503 @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6504 @item
6505 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6506 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6507 @end enumerate
6508
6509 @subsection Make a formal release available
6510
6511 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6512
6513 @subsubheading Install on sware
6514
6515 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6516
6517 @smallexample
6518 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6519 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6520 @end smallexample
6521
6522 @noindent
6523 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6524 are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6525
6526 @smallexample
6527 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6528 $ rm @dots{}
6529 @end smallexample
6530
6531 @noindent
6532 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6533 directory:
6534
6535 @smallexample
6536 $ vi README
6537 @dots{}
6538 $ rm -f .message
6539 $ ln README .message
6540 @end smallexample
6541
6542 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
6543
6544 @table @file
6545
6546 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6547 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6548 @itemize @bullet
6549 @item
6550 General announcement.
6551 @item
6552 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6553 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6554 @item
6555 Errata.
6556 @end itemize
6557
6558 @item htdocs/index.html
6559 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6560 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6561 These files include:
6562 @itemize @bullet
6563 @item
6564 Announcement of the most recent release.
6565 @item
6566 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6567 @end itemize
6568 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6569
6570 @item download/onlinedocs/
6571 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6572 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
6573 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6574 Something like:
6575
6576 @smallexample
6577 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6578 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6579 $PWD/www \
6580 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6581 gdb
6582 @end smallexample
6583
6584 @item download/ari/
6585 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
6586
6587 @smallexample
6588 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6589 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6590 $PWD/www \
6591 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6592 gdb
6593 @end smallexample
6594
6595 @end table
6596
6597 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6598
6599 Something goes here.
6600
6601
6602 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6603
6604 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6605 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6606
6607 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6608
6609 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6610
6611 @itemize @bullet
6612 @item
6613 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6614 @item
6615 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6616 day or so to let things get out)
6617 @item
6618 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6619 @end itemize
6620
6621 @subsection Cleanup
6622
6623 The release is out but you're still not finished.
6624
6625 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6626
6627 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6628
6629 @itemize @bullet
6630 @item
6631 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6632 @item
6633 @file{gdb/version.in}
6634 @item
6635 @file{gdb/NEWS}
6636 @item
6637 @file{gdb/README}
6638 @end itemize
6639
6640 @subsubheading Tag the release
6641
6642 Something like:
6643
6644 @smallexample
6645 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6646 $ echo $d
6647 2002-01-24
6648 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6649 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6650 @end smallexample
6651
6652 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6653 @value{GDBN}.
6654
6655 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6656
6657 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6658 indicates when the release was made.
6659
6660 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6661
6662 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6663 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
6664 committed all the release changes it can be set to
6665 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6666 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6667
6668 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6669
6670 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
6671
6672 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6673 trunk.
6674
6675 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6676
6677 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6678 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
6679 generated by running:
6680
6681 @smallexample
6682 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6683 @end smallexample
6684
6685 @noindent
6686 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6687 of the most recent release.
6688
6689 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6690
6691 @section Post release
6692
6693 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6694
6695 @node Testsuite
6696
6697 @chapter Testsuite
6698 @cindex test suite
6699
6700 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6701 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6702 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6703 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
6704 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
6705
6706 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
6707 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
6708 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
6709
6710 @section Using the Testsuite
6711
6712 @cindex running the test suite
6713 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
6714 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
6715 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
6716 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
6717 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
6718 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
6719
6720 @smallexample
6721 === gdb Summary ===
6722
6723 # of expected passes 6016
6724 # of unexpected failures 58
6725 # of unexpected successes 5
6726 # of expected failures 183
6727 # of unresolved testcases 3
6728 # of untested testcases 5
6729 @end smallexample
6730
6731 To run a specific test script, type:
6732 @example
6733 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
6734 @end example
6735 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
6736 spaces.
6737
6738 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
6739 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
6740 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
6741 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
6742 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
6743 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
6744 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
6745 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
6746 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
6747 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
6748 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
6749 program.
6750
6751 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
6752 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
6753 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
6754 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
6755 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
6756 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
6757 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
6758 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
6759 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
6760
6761 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
6762 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
6763 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
6764 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
6765 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
6766 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
6767 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
6768 tests for all of those.
6769
6770 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
6771 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
6772 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
6773 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
6774
6775 @smallexample
6776 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
6777 @end smallexample
6778
6779 @section Testsuite Organization
6780
6781 @cindex test suite organization
6782 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
6783 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
6784 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
6785 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
6786 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
6787 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
6788 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
6789 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
6790
6791 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
6792 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
6793 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
6794 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
6795 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
6796
6797 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
6798 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
6799 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
6800 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
6801 intelligibility.
6802
6803 @table @file
6804 @item gdb.base
6805 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
6806 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
6807 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
6808 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
6809 for prototypes).
6810
6811 @item gdb.@var{lang}
6812 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
6813 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
6814
6815 @item gdb.@var{platform}
6816 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
6817 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
6818 HP-UX.
6819
6820 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
6821 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
6822 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
6823 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
6824 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
6825 extensions.
6826
6827 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
6828 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
6829 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
6830 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
6831 @end table
6832
6833 @section Writing Tests
6834 @cindex writing tests
6835
6836 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
6837 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
6838
6839 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
6840 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
6841 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
6842 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
6843 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
6844
6845 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
6846 necessary. Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
6847 a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}. Like @code{gdb_test},
6848 @code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
6849 prompts.
6850
6851 Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
6852 On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
6853 spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
6854
6855 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
6856 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
6857 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
6858 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
6859 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
6860 uniformly.
6861
6862 @node Hints
6863
6864 @chapter Hints
6865
6866 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
6867 appear anywhere else in the directory.
6868
6869 @menu
6870 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
6871 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6872 @end menu
6873
6874 @node Getting Started,,, Hints
6875
6876 @section Getting Started
6877
6878 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
6879 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
6880 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
6881
6882 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
6883 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
6884
6885 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
6886 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
6887 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
6888 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
6889 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
6890 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
6891 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
6892
6893 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
6894 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
6895 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
6896 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
6897 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
6898 also documents all the available macros.
6899 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
6900 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
6901 @c Conditionals})
6902
6903 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
6904 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
6905 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
6906 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
6907
6908 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
6909 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
6910 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
6911 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
6912 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
6913 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
6914 approach.
6915
6916 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
6917 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
6918 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
6919 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
6920 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
6921 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
6922 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
6923 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
6924 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
6925 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
6926 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
6927 look like.
6928
6929 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
6930 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
6931 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
6932 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
6933 rather than worrying about all its details.
6934
6935 @cindex command implementation
6936 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
6937 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
6938 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
6939 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
6940 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
6941 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
6942 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
6943 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
6944 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
6945 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
6946 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
6947 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
6948 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
6949
6950 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
6951 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
6952 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
6953 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
6954 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
6955 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
6956
6957 @node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
6958
6959 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6960 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
6961
6962 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
6963 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
6964 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
6965 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
6966 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
6967 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
6968
6969 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
6970 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
6971 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
6972 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
6973 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
6974
6975 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
6976 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
6977 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
6978 @kbd{M-.}
6979
6980 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
6981 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
6982
6983 @section Submitting Patches
6984
6985 @cindex submitting patches
6986 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
6987 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
6988 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
6989 changes.
6990
6991 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
6992 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
6993
6994 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
6995 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
6996 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
6997
6998 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
6999 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7000 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7001 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
7002 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7003 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
7004 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7005 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7006 etc) can be
7007 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7008 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
7009 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7010 since we maintain it for them).
7011
7012 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7013 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7014 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7015 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7016 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7017 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7018 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
7019 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7020
7021 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7022 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7023 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
7024 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
7025
7026 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7027 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
7028 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7029 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7030 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7031 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7032 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7033 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7034 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7035 acceptable.
7036
7037 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
7038 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7039 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7040 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
7041 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7042 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7043 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7044 be for quite some time.
7045
7046 Please send patches directly to
7047 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7048
7049 @section Obsolete Conditionals
7050 @cindex obsolete code
7051
7052 Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7053 configuration macros. They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7054 should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7055
7056 @table @code
7057 @item STACK_END_ADDR
7058 This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7059 in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7060 core file itself. This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7061 gets the info portably from there. The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7062 files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7063 and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7064
7065 Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7066 is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD. Now that's old!
7067
7068 @end table
7069
7070 @include observer.texi
7071 @raisesections
7072 @include fdl.texi
7073 @lowersections
7074
7075 @node Index
7076 @unnumbered Index
7077
7078 @printindex cp
7079
7080 @bye
This page took 0.207633 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.